JP7020684B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition and paying out a game medium based on the fulfillment of a predetermined payout condition.

There is known a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generating a special gaming state in which a gaming value is given to a player when the result of the game becomes a special result. In such a gaming machine, information is transmitted from a gaming control means that comprehensively controls the game to a slave control means that controls production and payout (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-110126

The slave control means temporarily stores the information received from the game control means, but when an abnormality such as a processing delay occurs in the slave control means, an area for storing the information received from the game control means is stored. There is a risk that it will be buried and new information cannot be received. An object of the present invention is to make an appropriate response to a defect.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is
In a gaming machine that can execute a game based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition and pay out a game medium based on the fulfillment of a predetermined payout condition.
A game control means that controls the game in an integrated manner,
An effect control means that controls the effect based on the effect information transmitted from the game control means, and
A payout control means for controlling the payout of the game medium based on the payout information transmitted from the game control means is provided.
The payout control means
A payout information storage means having a payout information storage area for storing the received payout information is provided.
When the payout information is received, the legitimacy determination process for determining the legitimacy of the payout information is performed on the register provided in the payout control means, and the legitimacy is determined by the legitimacy determination process . Later, the payout information is stored in the payout information storage area, and when it is determined by the legitimacy determination process that the payout information is not valid, the payout information is not stored in the payout information storage area.
When the new payout information is received in a state where the payout information storage area is full due to the unprocessed payout information, the new payout information is discarded.
The effect control means is
An effect information storage means having an effect information storage area for storing the received effect information, and an effect information storage means.
A write index indicating the effect information storage area for storing new effect information, and
Next, a read index indicating the effect information storage area for reading the effect information, and
It is provided with an information counter indicating the number of the effect information storage areas in which the effect information is currently stored.
When the effect information is received, the effect information is stored in the dedicated area of the effect information storage area without performing the legitimacy determination process for determining the legitimacy of the effect information on the register provided in the effect control means. After storing in, the legitimacy of the effect information is determined, and if it is determined to be legitimate by the legitimacy determination, the effect information is stored in the storage area of the effect information storage area, and the legitimacy is determined by the legitimacy determination. When it is determined that the effect information is not, the effect information is not stored in the storage area of the effect information storage area .

According to the present invention, it is possible to take appropriate measures against defects.

It is a perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a figure explaining the structure of a special result. It is a figure explaining the operation mode in a special gaming state. It is a figure explaining the operation mode in a special gaming state. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a game state. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting change / confirmation process. It is a figure explaining the display in a performance display device. It is a flowchart explaining the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the common process of a special figure start port switch. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure hold information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure hold information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the look-ahead jackpot determination process. Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart explaining game processing. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart explaining game processing. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart explaining game processing. Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 variation start process and the special figure 2 variation start process. It is a flowchart explaining the fall lottery process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a figure explaining the decorative special figure command table. Special figure 1 It is a program list which shows the program structure of the stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the fluctuation start information setting process. It is a figure explaining the fluctuation time value table. It is a figure explaining the variation pattern number correction table. This is a program list showing the program structure of the fluctuation start information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the time shortening fluctuation number update process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating processing during fluctuation. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating processing during fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 display process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 display process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 display process. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end setting process 1 and the jackpot end setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end setting process 3. It is a flowchart explaining the process in small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the game machine state command transmission processing. It is a figure explaining the structure of the game machine state command. It is a figure which shows an example of the data structure of ROM which a game control device has. It is a figure explaining the jackpot determination. It is a flowchart explaining the main process of an effect control device. It is a flowchart explaining the command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining the received command check process. It is a flowchart explaining the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining the look-ahead symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining the look-ahead variable system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining the variable system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining the main process of a payout control device. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interrupt process of a payout control device. It is a flowchart explaining a command reception process. This is a program list showing the program structure of command reception processing. It is a flowchart explaining the payout device control start determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the payout busy signal editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the outline of a command process.

<First Embodiment>
As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is an outer frame (
It is assembled to the support frame) 11 so as to be openable and rotatable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) has a front frame 1
It is stored in a storage unit (not shown) formed on the front side of 2. In addition, the front frame (main body frame) 1
2 is a glass frame 15 (with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30).
A transparent plate holding frame) is attached.

In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 for decoration and production, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. are displayed as an abnormality notification color (for example, red). A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) with (), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, a sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided in the lower part of the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. A lamp for notifying the payout abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, at the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (which supplies a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown))
(Reservoir), the upper plate ball outlet 22 from which the game balls paid out from the payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 flow out, and the upper plate 21 paid out with the upper plate 21 full. A lower plate (dish) 23 for storing, an operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launching device, and the like are provided. Furthermore, the upper plate 21
On the upper edge, the effect button switch 25a for receiving the pressing operation input from the player
An effect button 25 with a built-in effect button 25 is provided. Further, a touch panel 29 for receiving a contact operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25.
Further, on the lower right side of the front frame 12, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.
In the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device may be provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25. A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub-display device.

Further, on the right side of the effect button 25, there is a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an ejection that is operated to eject the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A button 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the player rotates the operation unit 24, so that the hitting ball launching device launches the gaming ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the gaming area 32 on the front surface of the gaming board 30. do. In addition, the player can use the effect button 25 or the touch panel 2
By operating 9, in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) in the display device 41 (see FIG. 2), it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 is a flat plate-shaped game board main body 8 that serves as a mounting base for various members.
It has 0. The game board main body 80 is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the front surface of the game board main body 80 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and outer peripheral walls (guide rails) 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. The game area 32 is provided. The gaming machine 10 is configured to launch a gaming ball from a hitting ball launching device into a gaming area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 to play a game. A windmill, an obstacle nail, or the like is disposed in the game area 32 as a member for changing the flow direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case 40 that forms a window portion that serves as a display area for a variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32. Behind the window portion formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) for variablely displaying a plurality of identification information is arranged.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (cathode ray tube), for example. Still images and moving images can be displayed as effect images in the area (display area) where the image of the display screen can be displayed. Information about the game such as a background image that enhances the effect is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variable display), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is played. In addition, an image for producing an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

In the center case 40, a warp flow path forming member 614 that forms a warp flow path for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a game ball that has passed through the warp flow path roll. A possible stage portion 620 is provided. Since the stage portion 620 of the center case 40 is arranged above the start winning opening 36, the game ball rolled on the stage portion 620 can easily win the starting winning opening 36.
Further, the upper part of the center case 40 is provided with a board effect device 44 that produces a game by operating. The board effect device 44 can be operated from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

A normal symbol start gate (normal symbol start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40. Inside the normal drawing start gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 is provided. When the game ball driven into the game area 32 passes through the normal map start gate 34, the normal map variation display game is executed.

Two general winning openings 35 are arranged in the lower left gaming area 32 of the center case 40, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower right gaming area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3) provided in the general winning opening 35.

The game area 32 below the center case 40 is provided with a start winning opening 36 (first start winning area) that gives a start condition for the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game). The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

On the right side of the center case 40, a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning area) that gives a start condition for the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game) is provided. The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).
The ordinary variable winning device 37 includes a movable member (not shown), and the movable member always holds a closed closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) in which the game ball cannot flow in. Then, when the result of the normal fluctuation display game is a predetermined result, the game ball is easily flowed into the normal fluctuation winning device 37 by the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device (game). It is designed to be changed to a state that is advantageous to the person.

In the present embodiment, the movable member of the ordinary variable winning device 37 is the normal electric solenoid 37.
It is a so-called tongue-type ordinary electric accessory that opens and closes by advancing and retreating (sliding) in the front-back direction by c, but the movable member of the ordinary variable winning device 37 is not limited to this. Ordinary variable winning device 3
The movable member of 7 may be, for example, an attacker-type ordinary electric accessory that is opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the front side by the normal electric solenoid 37c, or a reverse "c" by the normal electric solenoid 37c. It may be a tulip-shaped ordinary electric accessory that opens in the shape of "".
Further, the normal variable winning device 37 can win a game ball even when the movable member is closed, and the game ball may be more difficult to win in the closed state than in the open state.

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, the game ball is not accepted or easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game between the normal figure start gate 34 and the normal variation winning device 37. A convertible first special variable winning device (upper large winning opening) 38 is provided. In the first special variable winning device 38, the opening / closing member (not shown) moves forward and backward (slides).
By doing so, the upper prize opening is converted into a state in which a game ball can flow in. 1st special variable winning device 3
In No. 8, the player is given a predetermined position by converting the upper prize opening from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure variation display game and facilitating the inflow of the game ball into the upper prize opening. The game value (prize ball) is given. The game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 38 is detected by the large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3).

Inside the upper prize opening (winning area), a specific area where the game ball can flow in is provided, and the lever solenoid 38f is provided so as to change the inflow probability of the game ball into the specific area.
A lever member that operates according to (see FIG. 3) is provided. A specific area switch 38d (see FIG. 3) capable of detecting the inflow of a game ball is provided in the specific area, and based on the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d, a state advantageous for the player can be obtained. It occurs (in this embodiment, a high probability state occurs after the end of the special gaming state). The game ball that has flowed into the specific area is discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38.

Further, inside the upper prize opening, a residual ball discharge port switch 38e (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38 without flowing into a specific area is provided. ing. The number of game balls detected by the large prize opening switch 38a provided inside the upper large prize opening (the number of game balls that have flowed into the upper large winning opening), the specific area switch 38d, and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38.
By matching the number of game balls detected in e (the number of game balls ejected from the upper prize opening), it can be confirmed that all the game balls in the upper prize opening are discharged, and basically this confirmation. Until the end of the event, the new top prize opening will not be opened.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, on the right side of the start winning opening 36, there is a second special variable winning that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A device (lower prize opening) 39 is provided. 2nd special variable winning device 3
In No. 9, the opening / closing member (not shown) moves back and forth (slides) in the front-rear direction to convert the lower prize-winning opening into a state in which a game ball can flow in. The second special variable winning device 39 converts the lower prize opening from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, and facilitates the inflow of the game ball into the lower prize opening. , A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. The game ball that has won the second special variable winning device 39 is detected by the large winning opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 3).

The game area 32 below the starting winning opening 36 is provided with an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that have not won in the winning opening or the like. Further, the game board main body 80 is outside the game area 32.
In the lower right corner of, the special figure variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game, special figure 2 variable display game)
And a batch display device 50 for executing a normal map variation display game is provided.

The batch display device 50 is a special figure 1 composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like.
It consists of a special figure 1 display (1st special figure fluctuation display unit) 51 for a variable display game, a special figure 2 display (2nd special figure variable display unit) 52 for a special figure 2 variable display game, and an LED lamp. The first storage display unit 53 for notifying the start storage number of the special figure 1 variable display game and the second storage display unit 54 for notifying the start storage number of the special figure 2 variable display game composed of LED lamps are displayed. Be prepared.

Further, the batch display device 50 has a round display unit 55 that displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39), and is advantageous to the player among left-handed (normal) and right-handed. A first game state display unit 56 for notifying a hitting method (a hitting method corresponding to a game state) and a probability display unit 57 for notifying a probability state (high probability state or low probability state) of a special figure variation display game are provided. There is. The batch display device 50 has a probability state display unit that displays that the probability state of the jackpot is in the high probability state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and a display that lights up when a jackpot occurs to notify the occurrence of the jackpot. A unit (display) or the like may be provided.
Further, the normal map display unit 58 that displays the normal map fluctuation display game, the storage display unit 59 for notifying the start storage number of the normal map fluctuation display game, and the time saving state that lights up when a time saving state occurs to notify the occurrence of the time saving state. A notification unit 60 and the like are provided.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is centered, for example, during the execution of the variation display game, that is, while the decorative special figure variation display game is being performed on the display device 41. Flashes the segment to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 100 msec. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51, in addition to the central segment, the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment is also blinked and driven. It is displayed that it is changing, and special figure 1
It is configured so that it can be distinguished from the special figure 2. Then, when the result of the game is "off", for example, the central segment (in the case of special figure 1, the eighth segment on the lower right side in addition) is turned on as the result mode of the off, and the result of the game is In the case of "hit", the result mode (for example, a number or a symbol) other than the result mode of the hit result mode (special result mode) is turned on and the game result is displayed.

The first storage display unit 53 turns off a plurality of LEDs for the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = holding number) among the number of winning balls to the starting winning opening 36, which is a variable start condition of the special figure 1 display 51. ,lighting blinking)
Display by.
The second storage display unit 54 is a normal fluctuation winning device 37 which is a fluctuation start condition of the special figure 2 display 52.
Of the number of winning balls, the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = holding number) is turned off and turned on by multiple LEDs (
(Blinking) to display.
The round display unit 55 is composed of LED lamps and the like, and when not in the special game state, all the LEDs are turned off, and during the special game state, the LEDs are turned on according to the number of rounds selected according to the special result. Turn it on. The round display unit 55 may be configured by a 7-segment type display.

The first game state display unit 56 is composed of an LED lamp or the like. For example, in the case of a game state in which left-handed hitting is more advantageous to the player than right-handed hitting (normal hitting), all the LEDs are turned off and left. When right-handed is more advantageous to the player than right-handed (when right-handed), all LEDs are turned on.
The probability display unit 57 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and for example, the probability state of a big hit is a low probability state (
In the case of the normal probability state), all the LEDs are turned off, and when the probability state of the big hit is the high probability state (probability change state), all the LEDs are turned on.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and is a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It is composed of a CPU unit 110 having a CPU unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. ..

The CPU unit 110 is a gaming microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
The U) 111 includes an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and has an oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 that generates an operating clock of a CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. The electronic components such as the game control device 100 and the solenoid and the motor driven by the game control device 100 include DC32V, DC12V, and DC5 generated by the power supply device 400.
A predetermined level of DC voltage such as V is supplied to enable operation.

The power supply device 400 is an AC-DC that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply.
A normal power supply unit 410 having a converter, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V, etc. from a DC32V voltage, and a game microcomputer 1
A backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of 11 in the event of a power failure,
It has a power failure monitoring circuit, and is provided with a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal that notify the occurrence and recovery of a power failure in the game control device 100.

In this embodiment, the power supply unit 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are on separate boards or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, mainly. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the above, it is possible to reduce the cost by excluding it from the target of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 (
In particular, the data supplied to the built-in RAM) and stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or even after the power is cut off. That is, the game control device 100 can store and retain information about the game even if a power failure occurs and the power supply to the game machine is stopped, and after the power failure is restored, the game can be restarted based on the stored information. It serves as a means for retaining the memory of game information.
The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. This R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, a process for forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200. Is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The game microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, Read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B and RA that can be read and written at any time
It is provided with M (random access memory) 111C.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores invariant information (program, fixed data, determination value of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C stores a work area of the CPU 111A and a storage area of various signals and random numbers during game control. It is used as. ROM111B or RAM11
As 1C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start storage to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), which is a fluctuation pattern after the reach state, and fluctuations before the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. When the special result mode is adopted, the gaming state is advantageous for the player (special gaming state).
At the stage where some of the plurality of display results have not yet been derived and displayed in the gaming machine 10
A display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state deviates from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. Refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas of the display device. When the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle after display and the result mode is displayed, the left and right variable display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example). The state in which the variable display is stopped due to the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display regions is satisfied (for example, the same). The state of identification information,
However, the special result mode may be excluded), and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from this reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and so on. Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3
Reach (SP3 reach) and premier reach are set. The expected value is no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <
It is getting higher in the order of premier reach. Further, this reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variable display game. That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived (when it is out of order) in the special figure variable display game. Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining a hit in a special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining a jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern in a special figure variation display game (not shown).
Random number generation to generate fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining (including the execution time of the fluctuation display game in various reach and fluctuation display without reach), hit random numbers for determining the hit of the clock fluctuation display game, etc. It is equipped with a circuit and a clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of a random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ing.

Further, the CPU 111A is the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game.
Acquire any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (big hit, small hit or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game, the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state. One of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables based on the number of start storages and the like. Here, CPU111A
Is a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the payout control device 200. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and controls for paying out the lending ball.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, a starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, and the like. The winning opening switch 35a in the general winning opening 35, the large winning opening switch 38a in the first special variable winning device 38, the large winning opening switch 39a in the second special variable winning device 39, and the gate switch in the general drawing start gate 34. 34a, a specific area switch 38d and a remaining ball discharge port switch 38e arranged in the first special variable winning device 38, and an out ball detection switch 32a that detects all game balls that have been fired into the game area 32 and finished the game. Connected to
An interface chip (proximity I) that inputs a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches and converts it into a 0V-5V positive logic signal.
/ F) 121 is provided. Since the input range of the proximity I / F 121 is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is illegally shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is cut and floats. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as the above and output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126, and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the large winning port switches 38a, 39a, and the gate switch 3
The detection signal of 4a is input to the second input port 123. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the specific area switch 38d, the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e, and the out ball detection switch 32a are input to the fourth input port 126. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124.

Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10, a detection signal of the vibration sensor 65 for detecting the vibration of the game machine 10,
The detection signal of the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10 are also input. It has become so.

Further, a signal from the setting key switch 152 for detecting the operation of the setting key operation unit is input to the third input port 124. The setting key operation unit is equipped with a keyhole for inserting the setting key.
It is configured so that the setting key can be turned from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. The setting key switch 152 is a sensor that can detect that it is in the state of being turned to the second position, and is turned on when it is in the state of being turned to the second position, and is in the state of not being turned to the second position. In some cases, it goes off.

The RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation unit are operation units for selecting from a plurality of probability setting values to which probability values that give special results in the special figure fluctuation display game are assigned, and operate these operation units. By doing so, it is possible to select a probability setting value to which a probability value that gives a special result is assigned in the special figure fluctuation display game, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value is used in the game. There is. Here, six "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared as probability setting values.

When selecting the probability setting value, R with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position.
By turning on the power of the gaming machine while operating (pressing) the AM initialization switch 112, the probability setting value can be changed to the probability setting value change mode, and the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated during the probability setting value change mode ( By pressing), the probability setting value can be changed. The selected probability setting value is displayed on the performance display device 153 for displaying the calculated base value and the accessory ratio. Specifically, the performance display device 153 displays information on the probability set value while the operation related to the probability set value is being performed (during the probability setting value change mode and the probability set value confirmation mode), and other than that. In, the calculated base value and the accessory ratio are displayed.

In addition, the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the second position (RAM initialization switch 11).
By turning on the power of the gaming machine (2 is not operated), the probability setting value currently selected is displayed on the performance display device 153, but the probability setting value cannot be changed in the probability setting value confirmation mode. The RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation unit cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is in the open state.
The performance display device 153 is a 7-segment type display, and displays the probability set value as a number from 1 to 6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and any display mode that can recognize the probability set value may be used. In addition, other types of display devices such as liquid crystal displays may be used.
The probability set value may be indicated by the lighting mode of one or a plurality of LEDs, the emission color, and the like.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 and the output to the fourth input port 126 (excluding the detection signal of the out ball detection switch 32a) are the main board 100.
It is also supplied to a test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37
The detection signal of a is configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 is an enable signal CE by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 by the gaming microcomputer 111.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changing to a valid level). The same applies to the third input port 124, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, in the input unit 120, a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting a radio wave) and a payout busy signal (payout control device). Signal indicating whether or not the 200 can accept commands), payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating payout abnormality), shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (it is full)), and a touch switch signal (for the input of the touch switch provided on the operation unit 24). A first input port 122 is provided which takes in (based on a signal) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from.
The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122, and are taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET whose noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is
It is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the game microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130 to turn off the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test firing test device. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is used for each port 122, 123, of the input unit 120.
It is not supplied to 124 and 126. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged in a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of the accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like are transmitted via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61, the panel radio wave sensor 62, and the vibration sensor 65, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, a game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test device via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the machine cannot control the game. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not go through the buffer, and the like. There is. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test device.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a second output port 134 connected to the data bus 140. The second output port 134 is a first large winning opening solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 1) 38b for opening the first special variable winning device 38, and a second large winning opening solenoid (large) for opening the second special variable winning device 39. Winning port solenoid 2) 39b, 1st special variable winning device 38
While outputting the operation data of the lever solenoid 38f that operates the lever member and the normal electric solenoid 37c that opens the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the display data of the performance display device 153 that displays the currently selected probability set value is displayed. It is a port for output.
Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. On / on the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of
A fourth output port 136 for outputting off-data is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with information about the gaming machine 10, such as jackpot information, from the external information terminal board 7.
A fifth output port 137 for outputting to 1 is provided. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device installed in a game store (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.), and can provide information about the game machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the operation data signals of the large winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b, the lever solenoid 38f, and the peripheral solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. It is output from the second driver 138b and the fourth output port 136 that output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the driver (drive circuit) 138a and the third output port 135. The external information signal supplied from the third driver 138c and the fifth output port 137 that output the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current draw side of the batch display device 50 to the external device such as the management device is sent to the external information terminal board 71. The fourth driver 138d to be output and the fifth driver 138e to generate and output a drive signal by receiving the display data signal of the performance display device 153 output from the second output port 134 are provided. Data is transmitted from the second output port 134 to the fifth driver 138e by serial communication.

DC32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. The fifth driver 138e has a D as a power supply voltage so that the performance display device 153 operating at 5 V can be driven.
C5V is supplied from the power supply device 400.
Further, the second driver 138b for driving the segment line of the batch display device 50 has DC1.
2V is supplied. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a current is passed through the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and a current is drawn from the cathode terminal via the segment wire by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in, and the LEDs are turned on.
The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied.
The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 500. Photocoupler 13
Reference numeral 9 is configured so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can communicate with the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the transmission / reception of such data is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, 124, 126 are provided. do not have.

Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36,
The start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the large winning port switches 38a, 39a, and the gate switch 34a in the normal variable winning device 37 are provided with a coil for magnetic detection, and the magnetic field changes when a metal is close to the coil. A non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball by utilizing a phenomenon is used. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like is a micro switch having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC) similar to the gaming microcomputer 111.
), And VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying video on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , Sound source LSI 314 that controls the sound output to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.
It is equipped with.

The main control microcomputer 311 is a P that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
A program ROM 321 consisting of a ROM (programmable read-only memory), a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and an Fe that can retain the stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure.
A RAM 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the production content, and V.
It performs processing such as instructing the content of the output video to the DP 312, instructing the sound source LSI 314 of the reproduced sound, lighting the decorative lamp, controlling the drive of the motor and the solenoid, and managing the effect time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30 from the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311.
C, a synchronization signal STS that gives the data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
Waits to notify the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM. A signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal sync signal HSYNC, and a vertical sync signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, the interrupt signal INT from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
Is to be entered. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An effect control command signal (effect command) such as a decorative special figure hold number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via this command I / F331. ). Game microcomputer 111 of game control device 100
Operates at DC 5V, and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V. Therefore, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 and a glass frame 15 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). Frame decoration LED control circuit 333, game board 3 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an provided LED (light emitting diode).
Board effect device 44 (for example, display device 41) provided in 0 (including the center case 40)
A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided to drive and control a movable accessory (such as a movable accessory) that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display in the above. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. Even if the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect), and is provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. A function to detect the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) and input a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.
A switch input circuit 336 having a function of detecting the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 has the effect control device 300 having the above configuration.
DC32V for driving a motor or solenoid, a display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving a motor or LED, in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the electronic components controlled by the motor. DC5 which is the power supply voltage of command I / F331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a voltage of DC15V for driving a motor, LED, and speaker. Furthermore, as the main control microcomputer 311, 3.3V or 1.2V
When using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as, DC 3.3V based on DC 5V.
And a DC-DC converter for generating DC 1.2V is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. In addition, VDP312 (VDPREST signal) and sound source LSI314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
, The amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps, motors, and the like are supplied to reset the state. Further, the effect control device 300 has a cooling FA that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10.
When the N45 is connected and the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on, the cooling FAN45 is driven.

That is, the effect control device 300 serves as a slave control means that controls based on the information transmitted from the game control device 100, and controls the effect based on the effect information (command) transmitted from the game control device 100. It serves as a production control means to be performed. Further, the CPU 311 serves as an effect calculation processing means which is an operation processing means for performing an operation process for the effect, and forms an effect information storage unit having an effect information storage area for storing the effect information received by the RAM 322.

Next, the configuration of the payout control device 200 will be described with reference to FIG. The payout control device 200 includes a CPU unit 210 having a payout microcomputer (CPU) 211 made of an amusement chip (IC) and an input unit 22 having an input port, similarly to the game microcomputer 111.
0, an output unit 230 having an output port, a driver, etc., a CPU unit 210, and an input unit 220.
A data bus 240 or the like for connecting between the output unit 230 and the output unit 230 is provided.

The CPU unit 210 includes a payout microcomputer (CPU) 211 and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and is an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) that generates an operating clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. ) 213 and the like.

The payout microcomputer 211 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 211A.
, Read-only ROM (read-only memory) 211B and RA that can be read and written at any time
It is provided with M (random access memory) 211C. Further, the payout microcomputer 211 generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 211A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 213. It is equipped with a clock generator.

The CPU 211A executes the control program in the ROM 211B, and the game control device 1
Based on the payout command (prize ball command) from 00 and the input of the ball lending request signal from the card unit 600, a predetermined number of game balls (prize balls, lending balls) are controlled to be ejected from the payout device.

The ROM 211B non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 211C is used as a work area of the CPU 211A and a storage area for various signals during game control. As the ROM 211B or the RAM 211C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

The input unit 220 is provided with an interface chip (proximity I / F) 221. The proximity I / F221 is provided with a frame radio wave sensor 84 provided on the front frame 12 to detect the emission of radio waves.
, The payout ball detection switch 81 for detecting the payout ball is connected, and the proximity I /
The F221 converts a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. Proximity I / F22 in this way
1 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F221 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

Since the input range of the proximity I / F221 is 7V-11V, the lead wires of the sensor and proximity switch may be illegally shorted, or the sensor or switch may be disconnected from the connector.
It is possible to detect an abnormal condition such as a lead wire being cut and floating.
It is configured to output the abnormality detection signal 1.

The output of the proximity I / F 221 is supplied to the input port 223 and read into the payout microcomputer 211 via the data bus 240. Further, the input port 223 has a shoot ball out switch 82 that detects a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow that detects that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (it is full). The detection signal of the switch 83 and
A communication signal from the card unit 600 connected via the photocoupler 226 is also input. Further, an operation signal from the error canceling switch 227 for canceling an error generated by radio wave detection or the like, which is provided in the payout control device 200, is also input to the input port 223.
Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F221, the detection signal of the payout ball detection switch 81 is the relay board 9.
It is also supplied to a test firing test device (not shown) via 0.

The data held by the input port 223 is stored in the input port 223 by the payout microcomputer 211.
It can be read by asserting (changing to a valid level) the enable signal CE2 by decoding the address assigned to.

Further, the payout control device 200 relays a touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided in the operation unit 24 output from the launch control device 700, and outputs the touch switch signal to the game control device 100. Further, the payout control device 200 relays the launch permission signal output from the game control device 100 and outputs it to the launch control device 700.

Further, the payout control device 200 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 225 for inputting a reset signal from the power supply device 400 and a payout command (prize ball command) from the game control device 100 to the payout microcomputer 211 or the like. , Schmidt buffer 225 has a function of removing noise from these input signals.

The reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 225 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the payout microcomputer 211 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 230. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the input port 223 of the input unit 220. Immediately before the reset signal RST is input, the output unit 2 is operated by the payout microcomputer 211.
The data set in each port of 30 needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but the payout microcomputer 211 is sent out from the input port 223 immediately before the reset signal RST is input.
This is because the data read by is discarded by resetting the payout microcomputer 211.

Further, the payout control device 200 includes DC32V and DC12V generated by the power supply device 400.
, DC 5V or the like is supplied with a predetermined level of DC voltage, and electronic components such as the payout control device 200 and the payout motor 91 driven by the payout control device 200 can be operated. Further, a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is also supplied to the emission control device 700 via the payout control device 200.

The output unit 230 is connected to the data bus 240 and includes a first output port 231 for outputting a launch permission signal 2 as a data signal to the launch control device 700. Launch control device 70
A firing permission signal generated by the game control device 100 and a firing permission signal 2 generated by the payout control device 200 are input to 0, and at least one of them outputs a firing prohibition signal. If it is, it is set to the prohibited state, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.
Further, from the first output port 231, the payout control device 200 is provided, and the payout control device 2 is provided.
A data signal for controlling the error status display device 250 that displays the error generated in 00 according to the lighting mode of the LED is also output.

Further, the output unit 230 is connected to the data bus 240 and includes a second output port 232 for outputting a data signal to the game control device 100. From the payout control device 200, a frame radio wave illegal signal indicating that the frame radio wave sensor 84 provided on the front frame 12 has detected a radio wave to the game control device 100 via the second output port, the payout control device 200 A payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control can be started, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow switch signal indicating an overflow are output.

Further, the output unit 230 is connected to the data bus 240 and is connected to the third output port 233 for outputting the operation data signal of the payout motor 91 of the payout device, the data signal to the external device, and the data signal to the card unit 600. Is provided.

Further, the output unit 230 receives the operation data signal of the payout motor 91 output from the third output port 233, generates a motor drive signal, and outputs the first driver (drive circuit) 236.
Is provided. Further, the third output port 233 outputs the external information signal supplied to the external device such as the management device to the external information terminal board 71, and the third output port 233 outputs the data signal supplied to the card unit 600. Two drivers 237 are provided. These drivers are supplied with the required power supply voltage.

The external information terminal board 71 is equipped with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device installed in a game store (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.).
Information about the gaming machine 10 can be supplied to an external device. Further, the payout control device 200 is provided with a photocoupler 238 for transmitting a data signal to the card unit 600.

Further, the output unit 230 is configured to be mountable with a fourth output port 234 connected to the data bus 240 and outputting various signals to a test firing test device of an accreditation body (not shown) via the relay board 70. The fourth output port 234 is a component that is not mounted on the payout control device 200 of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in a game store.

Further, the output unit 230 is provided with a photocoupler 239 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 500. Photocoupler 239
Is configured to be capable of bilateral communication so that the payout microcomputer 211 can send and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the transmission / reception of such data is performed using the serial communication terminal of the payout microcomputer 211 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, a port such as the input port 223 is not provided.

That is, the payout control device 200 serves as a slave control means that controls based on the information transmitted from the game control device 100, and controls the payout of the game medium based on the payout information transmitted from the game control device 100. It serves as a payout control means. Further, the CPU 211A does not serve as a payout calculation processing means, which is a calculation processing means for performing calculation processing for payout, and the RAM 211.
It is a payout information storage means having a payout information storage area for storing payout information received by C.

FIG. 6 shows the jackpot probability, the fall probability, the small hit probability, and the distribution probability of the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. The big hit is a special result (first special result) accompanied by the operation of the conditional device, and the small hit is a special result (second special result) not accompanied by the operation of the conditional device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is special as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning devices 38 and 39 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is activated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won, for example. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory.
It is used as a term having the same meaning in this specification.

The value (probability value) of the jackpot probability, which is the probability of a jackpot (first special result), is special figure 1 and special figure 2.
The probability value in the low probability state and the probability value in the high probability state are the probability values as shown in FIG. 6A, respectively.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6A, the same probability value is assigned as the probability value in the high probability state to all of "setting 1" to "setting 6", but different probabilities. A value may be assigned. That is, the probability value in the high probability state may be switchable in multiple stages.
Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6A, the same probability value is assigned to "setting 1" and "setting 2" as the probability value in the low probability state, but different probability values are assigned. It may be assigned. The same applies to "setting 3" and "setting 4", and "setting 5" and "setting 6". That is, the probability value in the low probability state is not limited as long as it can be switched to multiple stages. Further, the same probability value may be assigned to all of "setting 1" to "setting 6" as the probability value in the low probability state. That is, the probability value in the low probability state may not be switchable in multiple stages.

Further, the effect distribution and the like may be different between "setting 1" and "setting 2" having the same probability value in the assigned low probability state. The same applies to "setting 3" and "setting 4", and "setting 5" and "setting 6".
Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6A, there are six probability setting values (“setting 1”) for three types of probability values (probability value in the low probability state and probability value in the high probability state). "-" Setting 6 ") is assigned, but for example, three probability setting values (for example," setting 1 ") are assigned to three types of probability values.
-"Setting 3") may be assigned and the remaining three probability setting values (for example, "Setting 4" to "Setting 6") may be omitted.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, in the special gaming state based on the big hit (first special gaming state), the gaming ball flows into the specific region (probability variation operating region) of the first special variable winning device 38 and is detected by the specific region switch 38d. By being played (passing V), the high probability state is set after the end of the special gaming state, and the low probability state is set when the fall lottery performed every time the special figure variation display game is executed is won. The probability of winning the fall lottery is as shown in FIG. 6 (b).
Further, regardless of which of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game results in a high probability state, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game Both are in a high probability state.

The small hit probability, which is the probability of a small hit (second special result), is as shown in FIG. 6 (c). This small hit probability is higher in the special figure 2 than in the special figure 1. In addition, the small hit probability is always constant regardless of the gaming state and the big hit probability. In the big hit and small hit lottery, the big hit and the small hit are not won in duplicate. In this embodiment, the small hit is not provided in the special figure 1 but is provided only in the special figure 2, that is, the small hit probability of the special figure 1 is 0, but the small hit is not limited to this, and for example, the small hit. May be provided in both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Further, when the small hit is provided in both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the small hit probability may be the same in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the special figure 2 is better than the special figure 1. May be higher, and special figure 1 may be higher than special figure 2.

Further, FIG. 6D shows the jackpot types that can be selected in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, and the distribution probabilities of each jackpot type.
Special figure 1 The types of jackpots (first special result) in the variable display game are 10R probability variation jackpot and 4
There are three types: R probability variation jackpot and 10R normal jackpot. Similarly, there are three types of jackpots (first special result) in the special figure 2 variable display game: 10R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 10R normal jackpot. These jackpot types are selected based on the jackpot symbol random numbers. The number of each jackpot type indicates the actual number of rounds, and the probability change indicates that the game ball is likely to flow into a specific area (probability change operation area) and is likely to become a high probability state (probability change state) after the end of the special game state. It is shown that the possibility that the game ball flows into a specific area (probability change operation area) is low and it is difficult to reach a high probability state (probability change state) after the end of the special game state.
Here, the actual number of rounds is the number of rounds for which opening control is performed so that a winning ball is actually generated by opening the special variable winning devices 38 and 39. The number of each jackpot type is the number of rounds at the time of jackpot (the number of actual rounds + the number of rounds in which the opening time of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 is short and the opening control is performed so that the winning ball does not actually occur). May be.

In addition, a first special result may be provided in which the possibility that the game ball will flow into the specific area is lower than that of the probabilistic jackpot, but the possibility that the game ball will flow into the specific region is higher than that of the normal jackpot.
Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game ball is in the high probability state depending on whether or not the gaming ball flows into the specific region (probability variation operation region). If the game ball does not flow into the area, the high probability state does not occur, and even if the jackpot type is normal, if the game ball flows into the specific area, the high probability state occurs.

7 (a) to 7 (c) show the opening mode in each round in each jackpot type. The details of the opening mode are shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 7A, in the 10R probability variation jackpot, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened and the specific region (probability variation operation region) is opened in the first round, and a long opening with V is performed.
Long opening with V is an opening mode in which a game ball is likely to flow into a specific region (probability variable operating region). Then, after the second round, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened, but the specific area is not opened, and a long opening without V is performed.
As shown in FIG. 7B, in the 4R probability variation jackpot, the first special variation winning device 3 in the first round.
A long opening with V is performed to open 8 and open a specific area (probability variable operation area). Then, from the second round to the fourth round, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened, but the specific area is not opened. The long opening without V is performed, and the first special variable winning device 3 is opened from the fifth round onward.
8 is opened, but the specific area is not opened. V-less short opening is performed. The V-less short opening is an opening mode in which the possibility that the game ball will flow into the large winning opening is lower than the V-less long opening. That is, the long opening without V is an opening mode in which a winning ball is actually generated, and the short opening without V is an opening mode in which the opening time is short and no winning ball is actually generated.

As shown in FIG. 7 (c), in the 10R normal jackpot, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened and the specific region (probability variable operating region) is opened in the first round, and a short-circuit opening with V is performed. The short opening with V is an opening mode lower than the long opening with V in which the game ball may flow into a specific region (probability variable operating region). Then, from the second round onward, a long opening without V is performed to open the first special variable winning device 38.
It is V performed in the first round that the game ball can flow into a specific area (probability change operation area).
Yes Long open and V Yes Short open only. That is, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the specific round, which is the round in which the gaming ball may flow into the specific area, is the first round. The specific round is not limited to the first round and can be changed as appropriate. again,
The specific round may be multiple times, such as the first round and the fifth round.

As shown in FIG. 8A, in the long opening without V, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened with the start of the round (t11), and the openable time of 25,000 msec elapses or a predetermined number (a predetermined number).
For example, if any of the conditions for winning 9) game balls is satisfied, the first special variable winning device 3
8 is closed to end the round (t12). After that, the processing time for the remaining balls in the upper prize opening is started (t12), and the interval time is started when the processing time for the remaining balls in the upper prize opening is completed (t12).
At t13), when the interval time ends, the next round starts (t14). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

As shown in FIG. 8B, in the long opening with V, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened with the start of the round (t31). Furthermore, with the start of the round, the lever solenoid 38
While f is set to the ON state, the specific area switch 38d is enabled. When the lever solenoid 38f is OFF, the lever member covers a specific area and the game ball cannot flow in. When the lever solenoid 38f is ON, the lever member retracts from the specific area and the game ball can flow in. Will be. Further, the state in which the specific area switch 38d is effective is a state in which the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d is treated as effective. On the other hand, the state in which the specific area switch 38d is invalid is a state in which even if the game ball is detected by the specific area switch 38d, it is treated as invalid.

The lever solenoid 38f is turned off when 64 msec has elapsed from the start of the round (t32). Then, 100 msec after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off, the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid (t33). That is, the game ball that has won a prize immediately after the first special variable winning device 38 is opened may flow into a specific area.

200 msec from the start of the round, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed (t).
34). Then, after 2700 msec has elapsed, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened again (
t35), the first special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round ends when either the condition that the openable time of 25,000 msec elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins is satisfied. (T39). After that, the upper prize opening remaining ball processing time is started (t39), the interval time is started when the upper prize winning opening remaining ball processing time ends (t41), and the next round is started when the interval time ends (t42). .. In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

Further, after the second opening (t35) of the first special variable winning device 38, the lever solenoid 3
8f is also turned on for a predetermined time (t36 to t37, t38 to t39). Further, the specific area switch 38d is also effective (t36). The second opening of the first special variable winning device 38 is a sufficiently long opening, and the lever solenoid 38f remains ON for a long time, so that the game ball will almost certainly flow into a specific area. Become. Therefore, when the jackpot type is probabilistic, it will almost certainly be in a high probability state.

Further, the lever solenoid 38f can be turned on for a predetermined time even after the first special variable winning device 38 is closed (t40 to t43), and flows into the first special variable winning device 38 just before closing. It is possible for the game ball to flow into a specific area. The first special variable winning device 38 is due to the passage of the openable time or the winning of a predetermined number of game balls.
Closed and all the game balls that won the first special variable winning device 38 were discharged within the remaining ball processing time of the upper prize opening, the lever solenoid 38f was discharged at the end of the remaining ball processing time (t41). Is turned off and the operation is terminated, and the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid.

In addition, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed due to the passage of the openable time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and the game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 are the remaining ball processing time of the upper prize opening. If all of the lever solenoid 38f is discharged by the end of the period (t43) when the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off and operates when the discharge is completed. Is terminated, and the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid.
In addition, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed due to the passage of the openable time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and the game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 are the remaining ball processing time of the upper prize opening. If not all of the lever solenoid 38f is discharged by the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t43), the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t43) The lever solenoid 38f is turned off and the operation is terminated. In this case, the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid (t44) 100 msec after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off (t43).

As shown in FIG. 8C, in the short opening with V, the same opening as the first opening of the first special variable winning device 38 in the long opening with V is performed (t51 to t54), and the opening is completed. The round ends based on (t54). Since the opening of the first special variable winning device 38 is for a very short time and the ON state of the lever solenoid 38f is also for a short time, the possibility that the game ball will flow into the specific region is low. Therefore, it is rare that a high probability state occurs when the jackpot type is normal.

The operation of the lever solenoid 38f and the switching between valid and invalid of the specific area switch 38d are performed in the same manner as in the case of long opening with V as long as the game ball remains in the first special variable winning device 38. t55 to t63). Therefore, if the game ball remains in the first special variable winning device 38 even after the processing time of the remaining ball in the upper prize opening has elapsed, the lever solenoid 38f is in the OFF state when the discharge of the remaining ball is completed. The operation is terminated, and the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid. If all the game balls are not discharged by the end of the period (t62) when the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state, the lever solenoid 3
At the end of the period in which the 8f is in the ON state (t62), the lever solenoid 38f is in the OFF state and the operation is terminated, and after the lever solenoid 38f is in the OFF state (t62).
After 100 msec, the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid (t63).

Further, the first opening (t31 to t34) of the first special variation winning device 38 in the long opening with V shown in FIG. 8 (b) and the first special variation in the short opening with V shown in FIG. 8 (c). The opening of the winning device 38 (t51 to t54) is set to such an opening time that at least one game ball can be won by the first special variable winning device 38.

As shown in FIG. 8D, in the V-less short opening, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened (t71) with the start of the round, and the openable time of 200 msec elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9 pieces). ) When any of the conditions for winning the game ball is satisfied, the first special variable winning device 38
Closes and ends the round (t72). However, since the openable time is short, it is rare that a predetermined number of prizes, which are the conditions for closing, occur, and in most cases, the prize is closed as the openable time elapses. After that, the upper prize opening remaining ball processing time is started (t72), the interval time is started when the upper prize winning opening remaining ball processing time ends (t73), and the next round is started when the interval time ends (t74). ). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

Further, FIG. 7D shows an opening mode in the second special gaming state (special gaming state based on small hits). In the second special game state, first, the small hit fanfare time is started, and then
When the small hit fanfare time is over, the second special variable winning device 39 is released and 160.
The second special variable winning device 39 is closed when either the condition that the openable time of 0 ms elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls are won is satisfied. After that, the small hit remaining ball processing time is started, when the small hit remaining ball processing time ends, the small hit ending time starts, and when the small hit ending time ends, the second special gaming state ends. The second
There may be a plurality of types of opening / closing modes (opening time and number of opening times) in the special gaming state, and in that case, for example, it is determined which opening / closing mode is set (adopted) based on the small hit symbol.

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, the transition (transition) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing the transition of the game state in the present embodiment.
The game states include the normal game state ST1, the first specific game state ST2, and the second specific game state ST.
There are three. In addition to this, as the special gaming state, there are a first special gaming state based on the first special result (big hit) and a second special gaming state based on the second special result (small hit), but they are omitted here. In each game state, the special figure probability from which the first special result to be controlled by the game control device 100 is derived, the effect mode controlled by the effect control device 300 to determine the effect mode of the game, and the main in the game state. The main starting area, which is the starting area to be aimed at, the main variable special map, which is the type of special figure variation display game to be mainly executed, and the launch direction of the game ball are defined.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a left-handed hit can be aimed at winning a prize in the starting winning opening 36, and a right-handed hit can be aimed at winning a prize in the normal variable winning device 37. That is, it is possible to select the target starting area according to the player's will. Further, in each game state, the game is designed on the assumption that one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is mainly advanced, and the player plays the game according to this design. It is configured so that it is advantageous for the player to play the game mainly in the special figure variation display game, which is determined to be the main in the design so that the game progresses. In the following description, one special figure variation display game determined to be the main in each game state may be referred to as a main variation, and the other special figure variation display game may be referred to as an irregular variation.

In the normal game state ST1, the special figure probability is a low probability state, and there is no general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and there is no special figure fluctuation display game or normal. Figure Fluctuation display There is no time reduction to shorten the fluctuation time of the game. Further, the effect mode that defines the effect mode is a normal mode. The main variable special map is a special figure 1 variable display game, and the main starting area is the starting winning opening 36, and the firing direction is left-handed in order to aim at the starting winning opening 36. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variable display game is the irregular variation. In this normal game state ST1, a very long fluctuation time is set for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes inefficient in terms of time, and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at the acquisition of a small hit in the normal game state ST1. ..

In the second specific gaming state ST3, the special figure probability is basically a low probability state. However, in the special game state based on the normal jackpot, when the game ball flows into the specific area (probability variation operation area) of the first special variable winning device 38 (when the V is passed), the probability state is high. In addition, there is a general electric support that facilitates winning by improving the opening time per unit time of the ordinary variable winning device 37. If there is a normal power support, there is also a time reduction to shorten the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game and the normal map fluctuation display game. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is the chance mode. Further, the main variable special map is a special figure 2 variable display game, the main starting area is the normal variable winning device 37, and the firing direction is right-handed in order to aim at the normal variable winning device 37.
That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variable display game is the irregular variation.

In the first specific game state ST2, the special figure probability is a high probability state, and there is no general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and the special figure changing display game. There is a certain amount of time to shorten the fluctuation time of. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is the small hit RUSH. Further, the main variable special map is a special figure 2 variable display game, the main starting area is the normal variable winning device 37, and the firing direction is right-handed in order to aim at the normal variable winning device 37. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variable display game is the irregular variation.

In this embodiment, the probability of hitting the normal map fluctuation display game with the normal electric support (normal probability) is the same as the probability without the normal electric support (normal probability). In a state where there is a normal power support, the normal probability can be set to a higher probability (high probability state of the normal figure) than the normal probability (low probability state of the normal figure).
Further, in the present embodiment, the state without the normal variable winning device 37 means that the normal variable winning device 37 is opened, but the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 is shorter than the state with the normal variable winning device 37. be.

In the first specific gaming state ST2 and the second specific gaming state ST3, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is shortened as compared with the case of the normal gaming state ST1, and the normal variation winning device 37 is hit right. It is more advantageous for the player to play the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at. The special figure 2 variable display game has a higher probability of a small hit than the special figure 1 variable display game (in the case of this embodiment, the small hit probability of the special figure 1 is 0), and the small hit is won rather than the big hit. Since there is a high probability of this, small hits occur frequently in the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3.
If the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a small hit in the second specific game state ST3, the state in which the normal electric support is provided continues even in the special game state based on the small hit, and in the first specific game state ST2. If the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a small hit, the state without the normal electric support continues even in the special game state based on the small hit. Further, in the special gaming state based on the small hit, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened, but the first special variable winning device 38 is not opened (see FIG. 7 (d)).

Therefore, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit in the second specific game state ST3, most of the right-handed game balls in the special game state based on the small hit are normally variable prizes. A second device that wins a prize and is arranged below the normally variable winning device 37.
It does not flow down to the special variable winning device 39. Therefore, in the second specific gaming state ST3, small hits occur frequently, but it is difficult to increase the number of balls held by the player due to the small hits.
On the other hand, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit in the first specific game state ST2, most of the right-handed game balls in the special game state based on the small hit are normally variable prizes. Instead of winning a prize in the device 37, the game flows down to the second special variable winning device 39 arranged below the normal variable winning device 37. Therefore, in the first specific game state ST2, it is easy to increase the player's game ball by a small hit. That is, in the first specific game state ST2, small hits occur frequently and the player's ball increases, so that the effect mode is small hit RUSH.
It is said to be a mode called.

Of these three gaming states, the normal gaming state ST1 is the most disadvantageous state for the player. The second specific gaming state ST3 is in a state more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state ST1 because it has a general electric support. The first specific game state ST2 is a high-probability state, and further
Since the number of balls held by the player increases due to the frequent occurrence of small hits, this is a state more advantageous for the player than the normal game state ST1 and the second specific game state ST3.

The transition of the gaming state is performed by ending the first special gaming state based on the derivation of the first special result, exhausting the specified number of games, and winning the fall lottery which is the transition lottery to the low probability state. .. Basically, the probability variation jackpot is derived and becomes the first special gaming state, and in the first special gaming state, the game ball flows into the specific area (probability variation operation area) of the first special variation winning device 38 and the specific area switch. When it is detected in 38d (when there is V passage), it shifts to the first specific gaming state ST2 after the end of the first special gaming state. On the other hand, when the probability variation jackpot is derived and the first special gaming state is set, and the gaming ball does not flow into the specific region (probability variation operation region) of the first special variation winning device 38 in the first special gaming state (no V passage). In the case of), the normal gaming state ST1 is entered after the end of the first special gaming state. In addition, if a normal jackpot is derived and becomes the first special gaming state, and there is no V passage in the first special gaming state, the second specific gaming state ST3 (special figure low probability) after the end of the first special gaming state. 2nd specific game state ST
Move to 3). On the other hand, if a normal jackpot is derived and becomes the first special gaming state, and there is a V passage in the first special gaming state, the second specific gaming state ST3 (special figure high probability) after the end of the first special gaming state. It shifts to the second specific game state ST3).
Further, when the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times (support count) from the end of the special game state in the second specific game state ST3, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1. Also, the first
If the fall lottery is won in the specific game state ST2, the process shifts to the normal game state ST1.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game. Further, when the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a decorative special figure variable display game. again,
When the big hit (first special result) and the small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a hit (special result). Further, when the first special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a big hit, and the second special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a small hit, are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a special gaming state.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a gaming ball (pachinko ball) toward the gaming area 32 from a hitting ball launching device (not shown). The launched game ball is
The game area 32 is flowed down while changing the rolling direction by the direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the normal drawing start gate 34, the general winning opening 35, and the starting winning opening 36 are used.
, Ordinary variable winning device 37, 1st special variable winning device 38 or 2nd special variable winning device 39, or flows into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the gaming area 32 and is discharged from the gaming area 32. .. Then, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38, or the second special variable winning device 39, the number according to the type of winning opening. The prize ball is discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player adjusts the firing force and launches the gaming ball into the left gaming area (so-called left-handed) to move the starting winning opening 36 or the starting winning opening 36 to the left. It is possible to aim for a prize in the arranged general prize opening 35, and by launching a game ball into the right game area (so-called right-handed), the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device, and the normal variable winning device 37 It is possible to aim for a prize in the device 38, the second special variable winning device 39, and the general winning opening 35 arranged on the right side of the second special variable winning device 39.

A gate switch 34a including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal figure start gate 34 is provided in the normal figure start gate 34, and a game area 32 is provided.
When the game ball driven inside passes through the start gate 34 of the normal drawing, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the number of normal figure start storages is an upper limit number (for example, four) based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34. If it is less than), add the number of memory for starting the normal figure (+1)
), And one memory for starting the normal drawing is stored in the ROM 111B. The stored number of the normal map start prize is displayed on the normal map hold display 56 of the batch display device 50. In addition, the hit determination random value (hit random value) for determining the result of the normal map fluctuation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a is stored in the normal map start memory. It is supposed to be done.

Then, when there is a memory for starting the normal map and the normal variable display game can be started, that is, the normal variable display game is hit and the normal variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, that is, the normal map variable display game is not being executed. If it is not in the hit state, the hit judgment random value stored in the first stored normal map start memory is compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B, and the hit / miss of the normal map variation display game is judged. Then, the process of starting the normal map fluctuation display game is performed. When the hit determination random value matches the determination value, the normal map variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

Further, the game control device 100 predetermines a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns over a predetermined fluctuation time in the normal map display unit 58 provided in the batch display device 50 as a process for executing the normal map variation display game. After performing the display during the fluctuation of the normal map, which is repeatedly displayed in the ordered order, the process of displaying the normal map fluctuation display game in which the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed.
In addition, the general drawing display unit 58 is composed of a display device 41, and for example, numbers, symbols, etc. are used as ordinary identification information.
It is also possible to use a character symbol or the like to display the variable for a predetermined time and then stop and display the result.

If the result of the normal fluctuation display game is a hit, the lighting pattern, which is a special result mode, is stopped and displayed on the normal figure display unit 58, and the normal electric solenoid 37c is operated to display the movable member of the normal fluctuation winning device 37. Control is performed to open for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member). If the result of the normal map variation display game is out of sync, the normal map display unit 58 is controlled to display a lighting pattern that is the result of the out of alignment.

Further, the winning ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning ball to the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a, respectively, which are provided inside.
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) of the first start memory forming the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning of the start winning opening 36 is set.
The second start memory that forms the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4 pieces). Based on the winning to the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, the big hit random value, the big hit symbol random value, and each variable pattern random value are extracted as the starting memory information, respectively. The numerical value is stored in the RAM 111B as the first start storage and the second start storage. Then, the stored number of the start storage is the first storage display unit 53 (special figure 1 hold display) and the second storage display unit 54 (special figure 2 hold display) for notifying the start prize number of the batch display device 50. It is also displayed as a decorative special drawing start memory display on the display device 41 of the center case 40.

The game control device 100 plays a special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51 (first variation display device) based on the first start memory, and the special figure 2 display 52 (1st variation display device) based on the second start memory. The special figure 2 fluctuation display game is played on the second fluctuation display device). The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, but while one special figure variable display game is being executed, the other special figure variable display game becomes the first special result (big hit). In that case, one of the special figure fluctuation display games is terminated as a result other than the special result (missing result). In addition, if the other special figure variation display game has a second special result (small hit) during the execution of one special figure variation display game, the one is concerned until the end of the special gaming state based on the small hit. The special figure fluctuation display game is interrupted.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 executes the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 (first start winning area). It serves as a first execution control means for controlling. Further, the game control device (game control means) 100 is
It serves as a second execution control means for controlling the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning area).

In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, after the variable display is performed, a predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. When the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result mode (big hit result mode) corresponding to the first special result. It becomes a big hit and becomes the first special game state (so-called big hit state).
Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 corresponds to the second special result (small hit result mode). It becomes a small hit and becomes a second special game state (so-called small hit state). That is, special figure 1
The display 51 serves as a first variable display means capable of displaying a first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening 36. Further, the special figure 2 display 52 serves as a second variable display means capable of displaying the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37.

Further, the game control device (game control means) 100 is in a jackpot game state (first special game state).
After the end of, control to generate a game state (specific game state) in which the game can proceed in a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (the probability of hitting is high and there is a general electric support). It is possible to do. That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 forms the specific game state generating means.

In addition, the display device 41 corresponds to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game.
A decorative special figure variable display game that variablely displays a plurality of types of decorative identification information (numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc.) is being executed. The decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41 includes a decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and a decorative special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game. Yes, these are displayed in separate display areas. Then, the variation display is performed according to the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed according to the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special map variation display game.

That is, the display device 41 variablely displays the decorative identification information in accordance with the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) and the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) (decorative variable display game). It is a decorative variation display means that can display a decorative special figure variation display game). It should be noted that different display devices may be used in the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, or only one of the decorative special figure variable display games may be displayed. In addition, the gaming machine 1
The special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41 without providing the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 in 0.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the probability of a small hit is higher in the special figure 2 variable display game (the probability of a small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game is 0), but it is special in the normal gaming state. FIG. 2 Fluctuation display A long variation with a very long variation time (about 10 minutes) is selected as the variation pattern of the game. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes inefficient in terms of time in the normal game state, and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at the acquisition of a small hit in the normal game state. I have to. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is advantageous for the player to hit left to aim at the start winning opening 36 and play the special figure 1 variable display game.
The length variation time is about 10 minutes, but it may be longer or shorter (5 minutes, 50 minutes, 10 hours, etc.). Further, the time of the long fluctuation may be different depending on the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. Specifically, for example, when the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is off or a small hit, a long variation with a variation time of about 10 minutes is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game. Special Figure 2 If the result of the variable display game is a big hit, the special figure 2
A long variation with a variation time of about 5 minutes may be selected as the variation pattern of the variation display game.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the game control device 10
The control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of 0 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 12 performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 ms).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 10, first, a process for disabling interrupts (step X1) is performed, and then a stack pointer, which is the start address of an area for saving the value of a register or the like when an interrupt occurs. Stack pointer setting process (step X2)
)I do. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X4). In the case of this embodiment, the range of the RAM address is 0000h to 01FFh, and the upper rank is 00.
Take h or 01h, and set the first 00h in step X4. Next, the firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step X5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing stop signal, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 152 are read (step X6), and a process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7) is performed. In the process of step X7, the game control device 1 serving as the main control means by setting a predetermined initial value.
Waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program of the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to the instructions from 00 to start normally.
Is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first, and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can prevent the command from being missed. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the timing of the power-on delay timer is performed using a storage area (RAM area or register, etc. that is not subject to the validity determination) that is not subject to the validity determination (checksum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X8), and if a power failure has occurred (step X8; Y), the power of the gaming machine is supplied. Wait for it to be blocked.
Specifically, in step X8, for example, the number of times (for example, twice) that the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set, and the power failure monitoring signal is turned on. Determine if there is any. Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is on, it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the set number of checks. Then, if the power failure monitoring signal is not continuously turned on for the number of checks, the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. If the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks, it is determined that a power failure has occurred. The same applies to steps X34 and X54 described later. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the start of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when a power failure has not occurred (step X8; N), the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X9), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0 (step X10).
If the value of the timer is not 0 (step X10; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of determining whether a power failure has occurred (step X8). When the value of the timer is 0 (step X10; Y), that is, when the waiting time ends,
Permission to read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM and EEPROM is granted (step X11), and off-data is output to all output ports (set to no output) (step X12).

Next, a serial port (a port previously mounted on the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step X13), and the game microcomputer is used. A process (step X14) for activating a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator is a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and the CPU 1 based on the divided signal.
The 11A is provided with a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) and a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that gives a trigger for random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.
Next, the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X15). Here, on the premise that there is an abnormality in the RAM regardless of whether or not there is an abnormality in the RAM, the RAM abnormality flag is temporarily set in a predetermined register.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step X16), and if it is normal (step X16; Y).
Power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) in which the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal.
(Step X17). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X17; Y), the checksum calculation process (step X18) for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed, and the calculated checksum and the power are turned off. It is determined whether the checksums of the above match (step X19). If the checksums match (step X19; Y)
Since there is no abnormality in the RAM, the RAM abnormality flag is cleared (step X20), and the process proceeds to step X21.

If it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X16; N or step X17; N), and if it is determined that the checksums do not match (step X19; N), the step. It is determined whether both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the ON state based on the state read by X6 (step X21). Then, when at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the off state (step X21; N), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22). When the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22; Y), since there is an abnormality in the RAM, the main abnormality error notification command for notifying that the game control device 100 is abnormal is issued to the effect control board (effect control). It is transmitted to the device 300) (step X24).

On the other hand, when the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X22; N), it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23). Then, when the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23; Y), the command for notifying the main abnormality error is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X24). The probability setting flag set here is the probability setting flag set before the occurrence of a power failure. That is, if the power of the gaming machine is cut off and restarted while the probability setting value is being changed,
Since the operation of the game control device 100 is stopped, the process of step X24 is performed.
Next, the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped is output to the fifth driver 138e via the second output port 134 (step X25). As a result, in the performance display device 153,
The display as shown in FIG. 14 (h) is performed. After that, the on-data of the security signal is output and the off-data of the signal other than the security signal is output (step X26).
, Return to step X25.

Further, when both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the ON state (step X21; Y), it is determined whether the RAM error flag is set (step X27). Then, when the RAM error flag is not set (step X27).
; N) is set to the probability setting changing flag (step X29). As a result, the mode shifts to the probability setting value change mode. After that, the command for which the probability setting is being changed is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X30), and the process proceeds to step X31. Based on receiving the command during the probability setting change, the effect control device 300 displays the display device 41, emits light from the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, operates the board effect device 44, and the speaker 1.
Notification indicating that the probability set value is being changed is given by voice output by 9a and 19b.
On the other hand, when the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27; Y), the process of clearing the probability set value (step X28) is performed. As a result, 0 is set in the area for the probability setting value in the RWM, and the probability setting value becomes “setting 1”. After that, step X29,
The process of X30 is performed, and the process proceeds to step X31.

Further, when at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the off state (step X21; N), and neither the RAM error flag nor the probability setting changing flag is set (step X22; N and step X23). In N), it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is in the ON state based on the state read in step X6 (step X35). Then, when the setting key switch 152 is not in the ON state (step X35; N).
), It is determined whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the ON state based on the state read in step X6 (step X43).

When it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is not in the ON state (step X43; N).
That is, when both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the off state, the process proceeds to step X41 to perform the process when the power failure is normally restored.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the ON state (step X43).
In Y), the process proceeds to step X44 to perform initialization processing. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 serves as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make a means of conversion.

When the setting key switch 152 is in the ON state (step X35; Y), the probability setting confirmation flag is set (step X36). As a result, the mode shifts to the probability setting value confirmation mode. After that, the command for which the probability setting is being confirmed is issued to the effect control board (effect control device 300).
(Step X37). The effect control device 300 receives the command during the probability setting confirmation, and the display of the display device 41, the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46.
Due to the light emission of the panel, the operation of the board effect device 44, the output of sound by the speakers 19a and 19b, etc.
Notifies that the probability setting value is being confirmed.

Then, in order to guarantee the output of the security signal for 50 msec or longer, the value corresponding to 128 msec is saved in the security signal control timer area (step X31). The security signal is output in the probability setting change / confirmation process (step X123) of the timer interrupt process in the probability setting value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode, and in other cases, the external information edit of the timer interrupt process is edited. It is output in the process (step X120). Therefore, 12
When the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode ends in less than 8 msec, the security signal is continuously output by the external information editing process (step X120) of the timer interrupt process. That is, even if the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode ends in less than 128 msec, the security signal is output for 128 msec after shifting to the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode. To. The value saved in the security signal control timer area in step X31 is not limited to the value corresponding to 128 ms. However, at least 5 after shifting to the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode.
Since it is necessary to output a security signal for 0 msec, it is necessary to save the value corresponding to 50 msec or more.

Then, the interrupt is permitted (step X32), and it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is in the off state (step X33). In step X33, the determination is not made based on the state read in step X6 (state at power-on), but the state read in the input process (step X103) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) (current state). Judgment based on. When it is determined in step X33 that the setting key switch 152 is in the off state, the probability setting value is determined.
When the setting key switch 152 is not in the off state (step X33; N), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X34), and when a power failure has not occurred (step X34;
In N), the process returns to step X33, and if a power failure occurs (step X34; Y), the process proceeds to step X55. When it is determined in step X34 that a power failure has occurred while the probability setting changing flag is set, in step X23 of the main process (FIGS. 10 and 11) after the power failure is restored. It is determined that the probability setting changing flag is set.

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 152 is in the off state (step X33; Y), a process for disabling interrupts (step X38) is performed. Processing to allow interrupts (step X32)
) And the process of disabling interrupts (steps X38, X55), the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec). In the timer interrupt process, the probability setting change / confirmation process (step X123), which is a process related to the probability set value.
) Is performed. That is, the main process is on standby until the change or confirmation of the probability set value is completed (or until a power failure occurs).
Next, a command to end the notification is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X39). The effect control device 300 is based on receiving a command to end the notification.
The execution notification (notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed or notification indicating that the probability setting value is being confirmed) is terminated.

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40), and when the probability setting changing flag is not set (step X40; N), that is, when the probability setting checking flag is set. Is the area to be initialized (for example, the power failure inspection area,
The power failure recovery process (step X41) is performed to save the initial value at the time of power failure recovery in the checksum area and the area related to error fraud monitoring. The probability setting confirmation flag is cleared in this step X41.
After that, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure game processing number is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X42), and the process proceeds to step X47. In the case of the present embodiment, in step X42, a plurality of model designation commands, probability setting information commands, special figure 1 hold count commands, special figure 2 hold count commands, probability information commands, effect count information commands, screen designation commands, and the like. Send the command. As the screen designation command, if both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are in the normal processing described later, that is, if the special figure variation display game is not being executed and the special game state is not in progress, the command is waiting for a customer. Send the command of the customer waiting demo screen, otherwise send the command of the recovery screen. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a high-probability number-of-times information command or the like is also transmitted.

On the other hand, when the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40; Y), the RAM area other than the probability setting value is cleared to 0 (step X44). In step X44, the RAM area for the probability set value (work area (1 byte area of the probability set value)) and the RAM area for performance display (display of base value and accessory ratio) (work area and stack area) are cleared. Instead, clear the RAM area (work area and stack area) for game control to 0. Therefore, the probability setting changing flag is cleared in this step X44. In step X44,
You may or may not clear the stack area or unused area.

Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step X45).
.. The area to be initialized here is a customer waiting demo area and an area related to the setting of the production mode. Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X46). In the case of this embodiment, in step X46, a model designation command, a probability setting information command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, an effect number information command, and a RAM initialization command (customer waiting). Along with displaying the demo screen, a plurality of commands such as a command for notifying RAM initialization by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) are transmitted. Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands,
It also sends a command for the number of times of production information and a command for the number of times of support, which is information on the number of times the game is executed.

Next, a process of starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X47). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before the upper bit transposition) by exchanging them in a predetermined order and storing them as different bit arrangements (arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on.
Various initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, random numbers that determine the hit symbol of the special figure (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random number that determines the hit of the normal figure (hit random number) ), R as the initial value (start value) of the random number (fall lottery random number) that determines whether or not the fall lottery is won.
After saving in the predetermined area of WM (step X48), interrupt is permitted (step X4).
9). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it can be difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the initial value random number update process (step X50) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the winning random number, and the fall lottery random number are generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. It is configured as follows. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the CPU operating clock, and the jackpot symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, and fall lottery random number are processed by the program. It is a "slow counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing which is a unit. In addition, in the big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, and fall lottery random number, the so-called "initial value change method" that changes the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number goes around. "Is adopted. It should be noted that each of the random numbers is a continuous numerical value in a predetermined range, and the update method may be a counter-type update by +1 or -1, and all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. Random expression update may be performed. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the winning random number, and the fall lottery random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.
In this embodiment, since a random number (hit symbol random number) for determining the hit symbol of the normal figure is not provided, there is only one type of hit symbol of the normal figure, but a hit symbol random number is provided and the hit symbol of the normal figure is provided. May be selected from a plurality of types.

Initial value of step X50 A process of disabling interrupts after random number update processing (step X51)
Is performed, and the performance display editing process (step X52) is performed. Then, after performing the process of permitting the interrupt (step X53), it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (step X54), and if no power failure has occurred (step X54; N), the initial value random number update process is performed. (Step X5
Return to 0). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process, the performance display editing process, and the power failure monitoring are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step X50) (step X49), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process will be executed with priority, and the timer interrupt will be executed. It is possible to avoid the interrupt processing being overwhelmed by waiting for the initial value random number update processing.

In the initial value random number update process in step X50, in addition to the main process, there is also a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process, and if such a method is adopted, the initial value is used in both cases. In order to avoid executing the random number update process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt before updating and canceling the interrupt when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process.
When the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process as in the present embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. This has the advantage of simplifying the main process.

On the other hand, when a power failure occurs (step X54; Y), a process of temporarily disabling interrupts (step X55) and a process of outputting off-data to all output ports (step X56) are performed.
After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X57).
), The power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X58).
Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step X59) for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off and a process (step X60) for saving the calculated checksum, the RW
After performing the process of prohibiting access to M (step X61), it waits for the power of the gaming machine to be cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to the instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control device) that delays the start of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.
Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is provided. , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data and a RAM 111C.
An initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) that can be operated from the outside, and an initialization means that initializes the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112).
The game control device 100) is provided, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.
Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. That is, it is an interrupt routine that is started in a predetermined cycle. When a timer interrupt occurs in the game microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and FIG. 12
Timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step X1).
01). By switching to the register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, the D register) (step X102). In step X102, the same processing as in step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register banks are different. Next, input processing from various sensors and switches, signal acquisition, that is, input processing (step X103) for reading the state of each input port is performed.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104), and when the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104; Y). , Probability setting change / confirmation process (step X123)
To end the timer interrupt processing.
On the other hand, when both the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting checking flag are not set (step X104; N), the solenoids (large winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b) are based on the output data set in various processes. , Lever solenoid 38f, Fuden solenoid 37
Output processing (step X105) for performing drive control of the actuator such as c) is performed. When the firing stop signal is output in step X5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, the signal is not processed. Further, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of launch permission as seen from the game control device, and the second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the state of launch permission as seen from the payout control device is also payout control. Generated within the device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready to launch.

Next, a payout command transmission process (step X106), a random number update process 1 (step X107), in which commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes are output to the payout control device 200.
Random number update process 2 (step X108) is performed. After that, monitoring whether there is a normal signal input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switches 38a, 39a, setting the prize ball, the front frame and the glass. The winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step X109) for opening the frame and monitoring errors such as illegal winning of the normal variable winning device 37 and the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110). Abnormal discharge means that the number of game balls discharged from the first special variable prize device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e) in the first special variable prize device 38 is The number of game balls that have flowed into the first special variable winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the large winning opening switch 38a) is exceeded. If an abnormal discharge is occurring, the abnormal discharge flag is set. Then, if an abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110; Y), the process proceeds to step X116. That is, the game is prevented from progressing.

On the other hand, when abnormal discharge is not occurring (step X110; N), the start port 1 switch 3
Start port switch monitoring process (step X) to monitor the winning of 6a and start port 2 switch 37a
111). In the start port switch monitoring process, the start winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37
Various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted based on the winning of the game ball. And special figure 1
Special figure 1 game processing (step X112) that performs processing related to the variable display game, special figure 2 game processing (step X113) that performs processing related to the special figure 2 variable display game, and normal figure game processing that performs processing related to the normal figure variable display game. (Step X114) is performed, and a segment LED provided on the gaming machine 10 to display a special figure variation display game and various information related to the game.
Segment LED editing process (step X115)
I do.

Next, a magnet fraud monitoring process (step X116) that checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 and determines whether or not there is an abnormality, and a process that checks the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 and determines whether or not there is an abnormality. Radio fraud monitoring process (step X117), vibration fraud monitoring process (step X118) that checks the detection signal from the vibration sensor 65 to determine if there is any abnormality, and determines whether abnormal discharge has occurred. Perform the abnormal discharge monitoring process (step X119). Further, external information editing process (step X120) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer, game machine status command transmission process (step X121) for setting commands related to errors generated in the game machine, and performance display. The performance display monitor control process (step X122) related to the control of the device 153 is performed, and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting interrupt) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) are interrupt return processes. It is automatically performed at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, there is also a gaming machine that needs to be instructed to execute a process of restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process of restoring the register bank designation.

[Probability setting change / confirmation process]
FIG. 13 shows the probability setting change / confirmation process (step X1) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process.
23) was shown. In this probability setting change / confirmation process, first, it is determined whether the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is within the normal range (range of 0 to 5 in this embodiment) (step X13).
1).
When the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is within the normal range (step X131; Y)
The probability setting value display data corresponding to the value (current probability setting value) of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is set (step X132), and the probability setting value display data is transmitted to the second output port. It is output to the fifth driver 138e via 134 (step X134). This will result in
In the performance display device 153, the display as shown in FIGS. 14A to 14F is performed.
On the other hand, when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is not within the normal range (step X131).
In N), turn-off data is set as the probability set value display data (step X133).
The probability set value display data is output to the fifth driver 138e via the second output port 134 (step X134). As a result, in the performance display device 153, FIG. 14 (g)
The display as shown in is performed.

As shown in FIG. 14, the performance display device 153 is composed of four 7-segment displays (7-segment type display) arranged side by side. In the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode, the current probability setting value is shown on the rightmost 7-segment display among these four 7-segment displays, and the remaining 7-segment display shows "SET". It is designed to indicate the character.
Specifically, when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "0", the current probability setting value is "setting 1", so 7 at the right end as shown in FIG. 14 (a). When "1" is displayed on the 7-segment display and the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "1", the current probability setting value is "1".
Since it is "setting 2", "2" is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display as shown in FIG. 14 (b), and when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "2", it is currently. The probability setting value of is "Setting 3"
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 14 (c), "3" is displayed on the 7-segment display at the right end, and RW.
When the value of the area for the probability setting value in M is "3", the current probability setting value is "setting 4", so that "setting 4" is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display as shown in FIG. 14 (d). 4 ”is displayed, and when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is“ 4 ”, the current probability setting value is“ setting 5 ”, so that it is at the right end as shown in FIG. 14 (e). When "5" is displayed on the 7-segment display and the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "5", the current probability setting value is "setting 6", so FIG. 1
As shown in 4 (f), "6" is displayed on the 7-segment display at the right end. Further, when the value in the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is out of the normal range (abnormal value), the 7-segment display at the right end is turned off as shown in FIG. 14 (g).
For example, when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "0", the probability setting value display data is "1" in the first digit, "T" in the second digit, and the third digit. The probability setting value display data instructing to display "E" and "S" in the fourth digit is output to the fifth driver 138e.

Next, if the security signal control timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step X1).
35). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set in step X31 of the main process, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0".
Next, the on-data of the security signal is output and the off-data of the signal other than the security signal is output (step X136). In step X136, on-data of the security signal is output regardless of whether or not the security signal control timer is timed up. Therefore, the security signal will continue to be output during the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode (while the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting confirmation flag is set).

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (step X137), and when the probability setting changing flag is not set (step X137; N), that is, when the probability setting checking flag is set. Ends the probability setting change / confirmation process. On the other hand, when the probability setting changing flag is set (step X137; Y), the probability setting change / confirmation process during execution is the probability setting change / in the first timer interrupt process after the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. It is determined whether it is a confirmation process (step X138).

If it is the probability setting change / confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (step X138; Y), the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is not the probability setting change / confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (step X138; N).
Determines if there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139).
In step X139, the RAM initialization switch 1 is performed in the immediately preceding input process (step X103).
When an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of 12 is detected, it is determined that there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112. If there is no input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139; N), the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated.

On the other hand, when there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139; Y),
That is, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is newly operated, the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 5 (step X140), and the probability setting change / confirmation process is performed. finish. The value updated in step X140 (probability setting value after update) is displayed on the performance display device 153 by the next probability setting change / confirmation process.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6A, “setting 1” to “setting 6” are applied to three types of probability values (probability value in a low probability state and probability value in a high probability state). However, for example, "setting 1" to "setting 3" may be assigned to three types of probability values (probability value in a low probability state and probability value in a high probability state). In this case, in step X140, the value of the area for the probability setting value of RWM is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 2.

It is possible to shift to the probability setting value change mode by operating the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, and to operate the RAM initialization switch 112 during the probability setting value change mode. You can change the probability setting value with.
Since the RAM initialization switch 112 can only perform a pressing operation, it is not possible to distinguish between a transition operation for shifting to the probability set value change mode and a change operation for changing the probability set value. Therefore, when the transition operation (the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 that caused the transition to the probability setting value change mode) continues even during the probability setting value change mode, that is, the RAM initialization switch is performed from the time the power is turned on. If 112 is kept pressed, the probability setting value is updated (changed) according to the operation even though the operation is a transition operation.

Specifically, in the input process of the timer interrupt process (step X103), the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 read in the previous input process is in the off state, and the RAM initialization switch 112 read in the current input process is in the off state. When the state is on, the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 is detected. In the input process (step X103) in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on, the input process immediately before the power is turned off is the previous input process, and the input process immediately after the power is turned on is the current input process. There is a high possibility that the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 read by the process is an off state. That is, if the transition operation continues even during the probability setting value change mode, the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 in the input process (step X103) in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on. ) Is likely to be detected.
Therefore, in this case, if the processing of steps X139 and 140 is performed in the probability setting change / confirmation processing in the first timer interrupt processing after the power is turned on, it is determined that there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 based on the transition operation. There may be a problem that the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is updated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to avoid such inconvenience, the process of step X138 is performed, and the process of steps X139 and X140 is not performed in the probability setting change / confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on. I will do it. As a result, regarding the update (change) of the probability setting value, the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 that has been continued since the power was turned on (
That is, since the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 that caused the transition to the probability setting value change mode is ignored, it is possible to prevent an unintended update.

From the above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is the first gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) becomes a special result.
A storage means for storing one of a plurality of probability setting values to which the operation unit (setting key operation unit) and the second operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) and the probability values used for the lottery of the game are assigned. (Game control device 100 (RAM111C)) and a mode for shifting to a probability setting value change mode in which the probability set value can be changed in response to the operation of the first operation unit and the second operation unit when the power of the game machine is turned on. In response to the operation of the transition means (game control device 100) and the second operation unit in the probability setting value change mode, the probability setting value stored in the storage means (value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM). ) Is provided with a setting changing means (game control device 100), the operation of the second operation unit for shifting to the probability setting value changing mode (shifting operation), and the second for changing the probability setting value. The operation (change operation) of the operation unit is the same operation (pressing operation in the case of this embodiment), and the setting changing means continues from the time when the power of the gaming machine is turned on even in the probability setting value changing mode. It is configured not to respond to the operation of the second operation unit.
Therefore, if the operation (transition operation) of the second operation unit performed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on continues even after the transition to the probability setting value change mode, the probability setting value is not changed during that time, which is not intended. It is possible to prevent the change of the probability set value.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
FIG. 15 shows the start port switch monitoring process (step X1) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process.
11) is shown. In this start port switch monitoring process, first, the start port 1 (start winning port 36)
Prepare a winning monitoring table (step X491) and perform hard random number acquisition processing (step X49).
2) is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not there is information with a start opening prize set when a big hit random number is acquired based on the winning to the start winning opening 36 in the hard random number acquisition process (step X49).
3).

If the starting opening winning information is not set based on the winning to the starting winning opening 36 (step X493; N), the process proceeds to step X499. In this case, the information that there is no starting opening prize is set.
On the other hand, when the information with the starting opening winning is set based on the winning to the starting winning opening 36 (step X493; Y), it is determined whether the special figure has a low probability and no time reduction (normal gaming state). (Step X494). And, when the special figure is low probability & no time reduction (step X49)
4; In Y), the process proceeds to step X497. In addition, if the special figure has a low probability and the time is not shortened (step X494; N), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step X495).
, Performs the effect command setting process (step X496).

Based on the reception of the right-handed instruction notification command, the effect control device 300 performs right-handed instruction notification instructing the player to perform right-handed by display, voice, or the like. Right-handed is more advantageous for the player when in a specific game state or special game state, and the start winning opening 36, which is designed so that a player cannot win a prize unless left-handed, is in a specific game state or special game state. When a prize is detected inside, a right-handed instruction is notified.

Then, a table for setting the information of the hold by the starting port 1 is prepared (step X497).
, Special figure start port switch common processing (step X498) is performed. Next, the starting port 2 (ordinary variable winning device 37) winning monitoring table was prepared (step X499), a hard random number acquisition process (step X500) was performed, and a big hit random number was acquired based on the winning of the ordinary variable winning device 37. It is determined whether or not there is information on the starting opening winning that is set in the case (step X501).

When there is a start opening prize based on the prize in the normal variable prize device 37 and the information is not set (
In step X501; N), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. In this case, the information that there is no starting opening prize is set.
On the other hand, when the information with the start opening winning is set based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 (step X501; Y), is the Fuden (normal variable winning device 37) operating, that is, normal? When it is determined whether or not the variable winning device 37 is activated and the game ball is in an open state where winning is possible (step X502), and when the normal power is operating (step X502; Y),
The process proceeds to step X504. On the other hand, when the electric power is not operating (step X502; N)
(Step X503).

In the determination of whether or not a fraudulent occurrence is occurring, it is determined that fraudulent occurrence is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5). In the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if the game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some kind of abnormality or fraud has occurred.
If there is a winning game ball in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal winnings.
Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of fraud occurrence determinations (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

If an illegal operation is occurring (step X503; Y), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated any more. Further, when the fraudulent electric power is not occurring (step X503; N), a table for setting the information of the hold by the start port 2 is prepared (step X504), and the special figure start port switch common process (step X50) is prepared.
5) is performed to end the start port switch monitoring process.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
FIG. 16 shows a special figure start port switch common process (steps X498, X505) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process. The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are input.

In this special figure start port switch common process, first, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, information regarding the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored is input to the gaming machine 1.
The start port signal output count, which is the number of outputs to the external management device of 0, is loaded (step X521), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X522), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step X521). X523).
If the number of outputs does not overflow (step X523; N), the updated value is R.
Saved in the start port signal output count area of the WM (step X524), the number of special figure hold (start memory) corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored, that is, the number of special figure hold (start memory) to be updated is the upper limit value (step X524). Here, it is determined whether it is less than 4) (step X525). On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step X523; Y), the process proceeds to step X525. Here, the number of outputs can be stored up to 255, but if the number of outputs is stored up to the upper limit, the value is not saved after the update because it loops due to +1 update and becomes 0.

Then, when the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step X525; N), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. On the other hand, when the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (step X525; Y), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (the number of special figure 1 hold or the number of special figure 2 hold) is updated by +1. (Step X526), the target start opening winning flag is saved (step X527). Next, the address of the start port switch to be monitored and the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures is calculated (step X528), and the big hit random number prepared by the hard random number acquisition process is saved in the big hit random number storage area of RWM. (Step X529).

After that, the big hit symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step X5).
30), save in the RWM jackpot symbol random number storage area (step X531). Next, the fall lottery random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step X532), and the RWM is prepared.
Save in the fall lottery random number storage area (step X533).
Next, it is determined whether or not the winning is in the starting port 2 (normal variable winning device 37) (step X53).
4) If the starting port 2 is not won (step X534; N), the process proceeds to step X537. On the other hand, in the case of winning the starting port 2 (step X534; Y), the small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step X535), and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X536). ..

Then, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step X537), and the special figure hold information determination processing (step X53) which is the look-ahead process is performed.
8) is performed. Next, a start port switch to be monitored and a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared (step X539), and an effect command setting process (step X540) is prepared.
To end the special figure start port switch common processing.
That is, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36, and the predetermined random number can be stored up to a predetermined upper limit as the first starting memory. It serves as a starting memory means. Further, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37, and the predetermined random number is used as the second random number.
It serves as a second start storage means that can store up to a predetermined upper limit as start storage.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
17 and 18 show the special figure hold information determination process (step X538) in the above-mentioned special figure start port switch common process. The special figure hold information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining result-related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

In this special figure hold information determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (during the first special gaming state) (step X541), and if the jackpot is in progress (step X541; Y), the special figure hold information determination is made. End the process. On the other hand, when the jackpot is not hit (step X541; N), the start opening winning flag saved in step X527 of the special drawing start opening switch common process is checked, and the starting opening 1 (starting opening winning opening 36) is won. (Step X542).

In the case of winning a prize in the starting port 1 (step X542; Y), the process proceeds to step X544 to perform look-ahead. On the other hand, if the starting port 1 is not won (step X542; N),
It is determined whether or not the special figure has a low probability and no time reduction (during a normal gaming state) (step X543). Then, when the special figure low probability & no time reduction is in progress (step X543; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated. That is, in the normal gaming state, a long variation with a very long variation time (about 10 minutes) is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game, but in this case, the look-ahead is not performed. On the other hand, if it is not in the special figure low probability & no time reduction (step X543; N)
), It is determined whether or not the special figure is in high probability (step X544).

If the special figure is not in high probability (step X544; N), the process proceeds to step X548. On the other hand, when the special figure high probability is in progress (step X544; Y), is the value of the fall lottery random number prepared in step X532 of the special figure start port switch common process within the range of the judgment value of the fall winning? Determination (step X545). Next, a look-ahead fall lottery information command corresponding to the determination result is prepared (step X546), an effect command setting process (step X547) is performed, and a low probability determination flag is prepared (step X548).

Then, a look-ahead jackpot determination process (step X549) is performed to determine whether the jackpot is a jackpot depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (big hit low probability determination value). When the determination result is a big hit (step X550; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch is set (step X551), and the preparation is made in step X530 of the special figure start port switch common process. Acquire the stop symbol information corresponding to the big hit symbol random number (
Step X552) and step X559. On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step X550; N), the start port winning flag saved in step X527 of the special figure start port switch common process is checked, and the start port 2 (normal variable winning device 37). (Step X553).

If the starting port 2 is not won (step X553; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step X558), and the process proceeds to step X559. On the other hand, in the case of winning the starting port 2 (step X553; Y), the small hit determination process (step X554) of determining whether the big hit random value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. I do. and,
When the determination result is a small hit (step X555; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step X556), and step X535 of the special figure start port switch common process is set.
Acquire the stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in (step X557), and then
The process proceeds to step X559. On the other hand, when the determination result is not a small hit (step X555;
In N), the stop symbol information of the outlier is set (step X558), and the stop symbol information acquired in step X552 or X557 or the stop symbol information set in step X558 is saved in the symbol information area (step). X559).

After that, the look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information (
(Low probability) is prepared (step X560), and the effect command setting process (step X561)
I do.
Next, a pre-reading jackpot determination process (step X563) in which a high probability determination flag is prepared (step X562) and whether or not the jackpot random value matches the jackpot determination value (big hit high probability determination value) is determined to be a jackpot. I do. Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step X564; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch is set (step X565), and in step X530 of the special figure start port switch common process. The stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random number is acquired (step X566), and the process proceeds to step X573. On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step X564; N)
To check the start port winning flag saved in step X527 of the special figure start port switch common process, it is determined whether or not the start port 2 (ordinary variable winning device 37) has won a prize (step X567).

If the starting port 2 is not won (step X567; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step X572), and the process proceeds to step X573. On the other hand, in the case of winning the starting port 2 (step X567; Y), the small hit determination process (step X568) of determining whether the big hit random value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. I do. and,
When the determination result is a small hit (step X569; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step X570), and step X535 of the special figure start port switch common process is set.
Acquire the stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in (step X571), and then
The process proceeds to step X573. On the other hand, when the determination result is not a small hit (step X569;
In N), the stop symbol information of the outlier is set (step X572), and it is determined whether or not the special figure is in high probability (step X573).

Then, if the special figure is not in high probability (step X573; N), the process proceeds to step X575. On the other hand, when the special figure is in high probability (step X573; Y), step X55
The stop symbol information acquired in step X566 or X571 or the stop symbol information set in step X572 is overwritten and saved in the symbol information area in which the stop symbol information is saved in step X576 (step X574). The stop symbol information saved in the symbol information area is
It is used for look-ahead of fluctuation patterns.

Next, the look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information (
Prepare (high probability) (step X575), and produce command setting process (step X576).
I do. As described above, in the present embodiment, each time the special figure reservation information determination process is executed, the result of determination by the jackpot low probability determination value and the result of determination by the jackpot high probability determination value are the effect control device 3.
It is sent to 00.
Next, the special figure information setting process (step X577) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and the variation pattern setting process (step X578) for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed. I do.
Then, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number indicating the variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step X579), and the effect command setting process (step X580) is performed to determine the special figure hold information. End the process. The special figure information setting process in step X577 and the variation pattern setting process in step X578 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special map normal processing.

By the above processing, the look-ahead fall lottery information command including the lottery result of the fall lottery for the special figure change display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target and the look-ahead stop including the result of the special figure change display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target. A pre-reading variation pattern command including information on the symbol command and the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory is prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, whether or not the result-related information corresponding to the start memory (whether or not the jackpot probability state shifts from the high probability state to the low probability state (normal probability state)), and whether or not the jackpot or small hit is performed. , The type of variation pattern) determination result (look-ahead result) of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory, before the start timing of the effect control device 30
It is possible to notify 0, and in particular, the player is notified of the result-related information before the start timing of the special figure variation display game by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41. It becomes possible to do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination means capable of determining the result of the variation display game and the variation mode information before the start of the variation display game based on the start storage stored in the start storage means. Further, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start storage means before executing the variation display game based on the start memory (for example, determines whether or not a special result is obtained). Make a preliminary judgment means. It should be noted that the time to determine the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not limited to the start prize when the start memory is generated.
It may be any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is played.

[Look-ahead jackpot judgment processing]
FIG. 19 shows a look-ahead jackpot determination process (step X) in the above-mentioned special figure hold information determination process.
549, X563) is shown. In this look-ahead jackpot determination process, first, the lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step X581), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step X582). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step X582; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step X587), and the look-ahead jackpot determination process is terminated. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for the big hit has been missed.
On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step X582; N), it is determined whether the determination flag is the high probability determination flag (step X583). When the judgment flag is a high probability judgment flag (step X583; Y), the upper limit judgment value in the high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step X584), and the value of the target jackpot random number is the upper limit. It is determined whether it is larger than the determination value (step X586). On the other hand, when the determination flag is not the high probability determination flag (step X583; N), that is, when the determination flag is the low probability determination flag, the upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step X585). ), It is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step X586).

If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step X586; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step X587), and the look-ahead jackpot determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step X586; N), that is, when the jackpot is a jackpot, the jackpot is set as the determination result (step X588), and the look-ahead jackpot determination process is terminated.

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
FIG. 20 shows the special figure 1 game processing (step X112) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing.
showed that. In the special figure 1 game process, control of the entire process related to the special figure 1 variable display game and setting of the display of the special figure 1 are performed. In this special figure 1 game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 interruption flag set when the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted is set (step Y100). In the special figure 1 variable display game, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes the second special result (small hit) and the second special gaming state is executed during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game. , Is interrupted during the execution of the second special gaming state.

If the special figure 1 interruption flag is not set (step Y100; N), that is, if the special figure 1 variation display game is not interrupted, the process proceeds to step Y101, and the subsequent special figure 1 variation display is performed. Perform processing related to the game. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 interruption flag is set (step Y100; Y), that is, when the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted, the processing related to the special figure 1 variation display game in steps Y101 to Y115 is performed. Instead, the process proceeds to step Y116. As a result, while the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, the special figure 1 variable display game does not proceed (the special figure 1 game processing timer is not updated), and only the variable display continues.

In the processing related to the special figure 1 variable display game, first, whether the big hit / small hit of special figure 2 is in progress.
That is, it is determined whether or not the game is in a special gaming state to be executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit (step Y101). Then, in the case of a big hit / small hit in FIG. 2 (step Y101; Y), the process proceeds to step Y104. On the other hand, when the big hit / small hit of FIG. 2 is not in progress (step Y101; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process (step Y102) is performed, and the specific area switch monitoring process (step Y103) is performed.

In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. To monitor and set the large winning opening count command to be sent to the production control device 300 based on the winning to the large winning opening, and to close the large winning opening when the specified number of winnings are received in the large winning opening. Process. In the special figure 1 game process, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the result of the special figure 2 variable display game. Regarding the special game state executed based on the fact that is a big hit or a small hit, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the special figure 2 game process described later.
In the specific area switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d provided in the first special variable winning device 38 is monitored, and the specific area is specified based on the inflow of the game ball into the specific area (probability operating area). Performs the process of setting the area passage flag. Based on the fact that this specific area passage flag is set, a process for generating a special gaming state is performed.

Next, if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step Y104), and it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y105). And special figure 1
If the value of the game processing timer is not 0 (step Y105; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y116. Further, when the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y105; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the process is branched to the processing corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number. The special figure 1 game sequence branch table to be referred to is set in the register (step Y106).
Then, using the table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is acquired (step Y107), and a subroutine call is made by the special figure 1 game process number (step Y107).
Step Y108).

In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "0", the change start of the special figure 1 variation display game is monitored, and the change start setting and the effect setting of the special figure 1 variation display game, and the special figure 1 variation display game are monitored. Figure 1
Setting information necessary for processing during fluctuations Special Figure 1 Normal processing (step Y109)
I do.
In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "1", the special figure for setting the stop display time of the special figure 1 and the information necessary for performing the processing during the display of the special figure 1 are performed. 1 Perform the variable processing (step Y110).
In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command can be set according to the type of big hit, or each big hit type. Setting the fanfare time according to the big winning opening opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing fanfare / interval processing, etc. Special Figure 1 Displaying processing (
Step Y111) is performed.

In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "3", the opening time of the big winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step Y112).
In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the big winning opening. The large winning opening opening processing (step Y113) for setting the information necessary for performing the remaining ball processing is performed.

In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, the processing for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, or
Special figure 1 The large winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y114) for setting information necessary for performing the big hit end processing is performed.
In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "6", the special figure 1 big hit end processing (step Y115) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal processing (step Y109). I do.

After that, a special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 is prepared (
Step Y116), a lever solenoid control process (step Y) that controls the operation of the lever solenoid 38f by performing the symbol variation control process (step Y117) according to the special figure 1 display 51.
118) is performed to end the special figure 1 game processing. This special figure 1 game process is a process for performing a series of execution control related to the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game).

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing]
21 and 22 show the special figure 2 game processing (step X113) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing. In the special figure 2 game process, control of the entire process related to the special figure 2 variable display game and setting of the display of the special figure 2 are performed. The special figure 2 game process is basically the same process as the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process for the special figure 2.

In this special figure 2 game process, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is in the big hit, that is, in the special gaming state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being the big hit (step). Y131). Then, when the big hit of the special figure 1 is in progress (step Y131; Y).
To step Y134. In addition, when the big hit of the special figure 1 is not in progress (step Y1).
In 31; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process (step Y132) is performed, and the specific area switch monitoring process (step Y133) is performed.

In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. To monitor and set the large winning opening count command to be sent to the production control device 300 based on the winning to the large winning opening, and to close the large winning opening when the specified number of winnings are received in the large winning opening. Process. In the special figure 2 game processing, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit, and the special figure 1 variable display is performed. Regarding the special game state executed based on the result of the game being a big hit, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process.
In the specific area switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d provided in the first special variable winning device 38 is monitored, and the specific area is specified based on the inflow of the game ball into the specific area (probability operating area). Performs the process of setting the area passage flag. Based on the fact that this specific area passage flag is set, a process for generating a special gaming state is performed.

Next, if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step Y134), and it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y135). And special figure 2
If the value of the game processing timer is not 0 (step Y135; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y153. Further, when the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y135; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0. (Step Y136).

When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y136; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (step Y137), and the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is extended to the special figure 2 game processing timer area. The variable timer value (for example, 60,000 msec) is saved (step Y138), and the process proceeds to step Y153.
In order to prevent the player from intentionally executing the special figure 2 variable display game with a high probability of small hits in the normal gaming state, the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal gaming state is very long. (For example, 10 minutes). However, since the area that can be used as the special figure 2 game processing timer is limited, it is difficult to measure the fluctuation time at one time even if the upper limit value is set as the initial value of the timer. Therefore, the fluctuation time is measured by a plurality of times using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times the time is measured for a specified time (for example, 60,000 msec).

When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y136; Y), the special figure 2 game sequence branch table referred to for branching to the processing corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number is set in the register. Set (step Y139). Then, using the table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is acquired (step Y14).
0), a subroutine call is made according to the special figure 2 game processing number (step Y141).

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 variable display game is monitored, and the variable start setting and the effect setting of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the special figure 2 variation display game are monitored. Figure 2
Special Figure 2 Normal processing (step Y142) to set information necessary for performing processing during fluctuations
I do.
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "1", the special figure 2 sets the stop display time, sets the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 display processing, and the like. 2 Perform the variable processing (step Y143).
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command can be set according to the type of big hit, or each big hit type. Setting the fanfare time according to the big winning opening opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing fanfare / interval processing, etc. Special Figure 2 Displaying processing (
Step Y144) is performed.

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "3", the opening time of the big winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step Y145).
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the big winning opening. The large winning opening opening processing (step Y146) for setting the information necessary for performing the remaining ball processing is performed.

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, a process for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, or
Special figure 2 The large winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y147) for setting information necessary for performing the big hit end processing is performed.
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "6", the special figure 2 big hit end processing (step Y148) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing (step Y108). I do.

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "7", the opening time / opening pattern of the large winning opening when a small hit occurs is set, the fanfare command is set, and the small hit medium processing is performed. Processing during small hit fanfare (step Y1) to set necessary information for
49).
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "8", the small hit middle processing (step Y150) for setting the ending command, setting the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, and the like is performed. conduct.

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "9", the processing for setting the time for the remaining balls that have won in the large winning opening during the small hit medium processing and the small hit end. Small hit remaining ball processing (step Y151) for setting information necessary for processing is performed.
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "10", the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y152) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing is performed.

After that, a special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 is prepared (
Step Y153), a lever solenoid control process (step Y) that controls the operation of the lever solenoid 38f by performing the symbol fluctuation control process (step Y154) according to the special figure 2 display 52.
155) is performed to end the special figure 2 game processing. This special figure 2 game process is a process for performing a series of execution control regarding the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). The above-mentioned special figure 2 game processing basically performs the same processing as the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing for special figure 2, and in the following description, the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing. The corresponding processing will be explained in parallel in.

[Special Figure 1 Normal processing]
FIG. 23 shows the special figure 1 normal process (step Y109) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process. In this special figure 1 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 can start to fluctuate (step Y201). The state in which the special figure 1 in this determination can start the change is not between the stop of the change of the special figure 2 change display game, which is a big hit or a small hit, and the end of the special gaming state. It should be noted that although the fluctuation cannot be started even during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special game state based on the special figure 1 variable display game, in that case, the special figure 1 normal processing is not executed. , It is not necessary to judge this here.

When the special figure 1 is not variable startable (step Y201; N), "0" is set as the special figure 1 game processing number (step Y216), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area. (Step Y217), Special Figure 1 The normal processing is completed. Further, when the special figure 1 is capable of starting fluctuation (step Y201; Y), it is determined whether the left-handed instruction notification has been completed, that is, whether the left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y202).
If the left-handed instruction has been notified (step Y202; Y), the process proceeds to step Y206. If the left-handed instruction notification has not been notified (step Y202; N), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step Y203), and the effect command setting process (step Y20) is prepared.
4) is performed to set the left-handed instruction notification flag (step Y205). The left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared when the specific game state ends, so that the left-handed instruction notification is performed when the normal game state is entered.

Next, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step Y206), and if the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step Y206; Y), the process proceeds to step Y216. Further, when the number of pending special figures 1 is not 0 (step Y206; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y207), and an effect command setting process (step Y2) is prepared.
08) is performed. After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step Y209) for setting the information related to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed, and the decorative special figure 1 hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared (step Y210). ), The effect command setting process (step Y211) is performed.
At the time of performing the process of preparing the decorative special figure hold number command (step Y210), the special figure 1 hold number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the current special figure 1 hold is not performed. A hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number obtained by subtracting -1 from the number is prepared. After that, the remaining game count command corresponding to the time reduction fluctuation number is prepared (step Y212), and the effect command setting process (step Y213) is performed.

Next, the special figure 1 changing state is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y21).
4). Here, the special figure status indicates the state of the special figure fluctuation display game, and is 0 to 5.
Is set. The special figure status 0 indicates a state in which neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, and the special figure status 1 indicates a state in which only the special figure 1 variable display game is executed. The special figure status 2 indicates a state in which only the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. Further, the special figure status 3 indicates a state in which both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are being executed, and the special figure status 4 is the first special gaming state which is a special gaming state based on a big hit. The special figure status 5 indicates that there is a second special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a small hit. Here, since the special figure 1 variable display game is started, 1 or 3 is set as the special figure status. After that, the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process (step Y215) is performed, and the special figure 1 normal process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Normal processing]
FIG. 24 shows the special figure 2 normal process (step Y142) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. In this special figure 2 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 can start to fluctuate (step Y221). The state in which the special figure 2 in this determination can start the change is not between the stop of the change of the special figure 1 change display game, which is a big hit, and the end of the special gaming state. It should be noted that although the fluctuation cannot be started even during the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game or the special game state based on the special figure 2 variable display game, in that case, the special figure 2 normal processing is not executed. , It is not necessary to judge this here.

When the special figure 2 is not variable startable (step Y221; N), "0" is set as the special figure 2 game processing number (step Y238), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area. (Step Y239), Special Figure 2 The normal processing is completed. Further, when the special figure 2 can start to fluctuate (step Y221; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figures 2 is 0 (step Y222).

Then, when the number of reserved figures 2 is not 0 (step Y222; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y223), and an effect command setting process (step Y224) is performed. .. After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step Y225) for setting the information related to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed, and the decorative special figure 2 hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is prepared (step Y226). ), The effect command setting process (step Y227) is performed. The process of preparing the decoration special figure hold number command (step Y226).
At the time of performing, the special figure 2 hold number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number -1 from the current special figure 2 hold number is performed. Are preparing. After that, the remaining game count command corresponding to the time reduction fluctuation number is prepared (step Y228), and the effect command setting process (step Y229) is performed.

Next, the special figure 2 changing state is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y23).
0). Here, since the special figure 2 variable display game is started, 2 or 3 is set as the special figure status.
Is set. After that, the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process (step Y231) is performed, and the special figure 2 normal process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved special figures 2 is 0 (step Y222; Y), the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0.
(Step Y232). Then, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step Y232; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is changing (step Y233). Then, when the special figure 1 is not changing (step Y233; N), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has been started (step Y234), and when it has not been started (step Y234; N), it is determined.
Performs processing related to setting the customer waiting state. Further, when the number of pending special figures 1 is not 0 (step Y).
232; N), when the special figure 1 is changing (step Y233; Y) or when the customer waiting demo has been started (step Y234; Y), the process proceeds to step Y238.

In the process related to the setting of the customer waiting state, first, the customer waiting demo flag area is set (step Y235), the customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y236), and the effect is produced. The command setting process (step Y237) is performed, and the process proceeds to step Y238. By making the customer waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to display different customer waiting screens according to the probability state.

Further, if the effect control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the effect control device 300 that does not have the backup function loses the information on the gaming state, so that it becomes impossible to perform an appropriate effect. By making the waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to perform an effect according to the game state from the reception of this command, and the probability information command based on the change in the game state is transmitted. You will be able to return to the production according to the game state faster than waiting.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, and it is conceivable that the probability state changes depending on the processing of the special figure 1 variable display game. Therefore, the fluctuation start probability information command is transmitted every time the special figure fluctuation display game is started (steps Y207 and Y223). As a result, the effect control device 30
At 0, it is possible to perform an appropriate effect according to the gaming state.

In addition, by transmitting the fluctuation start probability information command every time the special figure fluctuation display game starts, even if the effect control device 300 is restarted, the effect according to the game state can be performed from the reception of this command. It becomes possible to return to the production according to the game state faster than waiting for the probability information command based on the change of the game state to be transmitted. It should be noted that the customer waiting demo command and the fluctuation start probability information command may include other information for allowing the effect control device 300 to return to the effect according to the game state when the effect control device 300 is restarted.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 25A shows the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step Y2) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 normal process.
09) is shown. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game. In this special figure 1 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 1 information setting flag used for sorting the fluctuation pattern in the special figure hold information determination process is set (step Y241). Then R
WM special figure 1 fall lottery random number storage area (for hold number 1) is loaded with random numbers and prepared (step Y242), and special figure 1 fall lottery random number storage area (for hold number 1) is cleared to 0 (step). Y
243), fall lottery processing (step Y24) to draw a lottery for the transition from the high probability state to the low probability state.
4) is performed. It should be noted that the reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1).

Next, the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step Y245) for setting the missed information or the jackpot information as the result information of the special figure 1 variable display game is performed, and the special figure 1 stop related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) is performed. The symbol setting process (step Y246) is performed. Then, the special figure 1 information setting process (step Y24) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern.
7) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set (step Y248).

After that, the special figure 1 for setting the fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game.
The variation pattern setting process (step Y249) is performed, the variation start information setting process (step Y250) for setting the variation start information of the special figure 1 variation display game is performed, and the time reduction variation number update process (step Y251) is performed. .. Next, "1" related to the special figure 1 changing process is set as the process number (step Y252), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step Y253).

Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y254), and the signal related to the start of fluctuation of special figure 1 (for example, the signal during change of special symbol 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y255). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y256), and the blinking control timer (special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area.
Save the initial value (here, 100 ms) of the blinking cycle timer (step Y257).
), The initial value (here, "0" indicating a blank symbol) is saved in the symbol number area during the change of the special figure 1 (step Y258), and the change start process of the special figure 1 is terminated.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 25B shows the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step Y2) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 normal process.
25) was shown. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game. In this special figure 2 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 2 information setting flag used for sorting the fluctuation pattern in the special figure hold information determination process is set (step Y261). Then R
Prepare by loading random numbers from the special figure 2 fall lottery random number storage area (for hold number 1) of WM (step Y262), and clear 0 in the special figure 2 fall lottery random number storage area (for hold number 1) (step). Y
263), fall lottery processing (step Y26) to draw a lottery for the transition from the high probability state to the low probability state.
4) is performed. It should be noted that the reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2).

Next, the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step Y265) for setting the missed information, the jackpot information, or the small hit information is performed as the result information of the special figure 2 variation display game, and the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) is performed. Special figure 2 Stop symbol setting process (step Y266) is performed. Then, in order to perform the special figure 2 information setting process (step Y267) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern, and to refer to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. A special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which the information of FIG. 2 is set, is prepared (step Y268).

After that, the special figure 2 which sets the fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation mode in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game.
The variation pattern setting process (step Y269) is performed, the variation start information setting process (step Y270) for setting the variation start information of the special figure 2 variation display game is performed, and the time reduction variation start update process (step Y271) is performed. .. Next, "1" related to the special figure 2 changing process is set as the process number (step Y272), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step Y273).

Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y274), and the signal related to the start of fluctuation of special figure 2 (for example, the signal during change of special symbol 2 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y275). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y276), and the blinking control timer (special figure 2 display 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area.
Save the initial value (here, 100 ms) of the blinking cycle timer (step Y277).
), The initial value (here, "0" indicating a blank symbol) is saved in the symbol number area during the change of the special figure 2 (step Y278), and the change start process of the special figure 2 is terminated.

When selecting the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start process or special figure 2 variation start process, the information of the set probability setting value may be referred to. This makes it possible to perform an effect of suggesting or notifying the probability set value, such as selecting a fluctuation pattern according to the probability set value or making the selection probability of the fluctuation pattern different according to the probability set value.

[Fall lottery process]
FIG. 26 shows a fall lottery process (steps Y244 and Y264) performed in the special figure 1 change start process and the special figure 2 change start process. In this fall lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure is in high probability (step Y581), and if it is not in the special figure high probability (step Y581; N), the fall lottery process is terminated. In addition, when the special figure is in high probability (step Y581; Y).
In, it is determined whether the value of the target fall lottery random number is less than the fall lottery lower limit determination value (step Y582).
). It should be noted that winning the fall lottery means that the fall lottery random number matches the fall lottery determination value. The fall lottery judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the fall lottery random number is equal to or higher than the fall lottery lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the fall lottery judgment value, and is the upper limit value of the fall lottery judgment value. If it is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value, it is determined that the fall lottery has been won.

If the value of the fall lottery random number is less than the fall lottery lower limit determination value (step Y582; Y), that is, if the fall lottery is not won, the fall lottery process is terminated. In this case, the high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, when the value of the fall lottery random number is not less than the fall lottery lower limit determination value (step Y582; N), it is determined whether the value of the target fall lottery random number is larger than the fall lottery upper limit determination value (step Y583).
If the value of the fall lottery random number is larger than the fall lottery upper limit determination value (step Y583; Y), that is, if the fall lottery is not won, the fall lottery process is terminated. In this case, the high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, when the value of the fall lottery random number is not larger than the fall lottery upper limit judgment value (
Step X583; N), that is, when the fall lottery is won, the process for shifting to the low probability state is performed.

In the process for shifting to the low probability state, first, the signal relating to the high probability end is saved in the external information output data area (step Y584). Here, the big hit 2 signal is set to ON, and the big hit 4 signal is set to OFF. Next, the signal relating to the end of high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y585). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is O.
FF, special symbol 2 high probability state signal OFF, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal OFF,
Special symbol 2 Set the fluctuation time shortening status signal to OFF.
Then, the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y5).
86), the number without time reduction is saved in the game status display number area (step Y587). After that, the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y588), and the fall lottery process is completed. As a result, it becomes a low-probability state and a state without normal electric support, and shifts to a normal game state. Information on the end of the high-probability state and the end of the general electric support is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 3
In 00, processing such as changing the effect mode is performed based on this information.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 27A shows the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step Y245) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In this jackpot flag 1 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (step Y281). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM (step Y282), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y282). Step Y283).

After that, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 2 which is the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is a jackpot (step Y284), and when it is a jackpot (step Y284; Y).
Ends the jackpot flag 1 setting process. That is, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are not made a big hit. If it is not a big hit (step Y284; N), a big hit determination process (step Y285) is performed to determine whether the acquired big hit random value is a big hit depending on whether or not it matches the big hit determination value.

Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y285) is a jackpot (step Y286; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step Y281 (step). Y287), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y285) is not a jackpot (
In step Y286; N), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. In this case, the loss information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 27B shows the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step Y265) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y291), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y292). Next, RWM's special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for 1 hold number)
Load and prepare the jackpot random number from (step Y293), and special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (step Y293).
Clear 0 (for 1 hold number) (step Y294).

After that, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 1 which is the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is a jackpot (step Y295), and when it is a jackpot (step Y295; Y).
To step Y299. That is, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are not made a big hit. If it is not a big hit (step Y295; N), a big hit determination process (step Y296) is performed to determine whether the acquired big hit random value is a big hit depending on whether or not it matches the big hit determination value.
Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y296) is a jackpot (step Y297; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step Y292 (step). Y298), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the judgment result of the big hit determination process (step Y296) is not a big hit (step Y297; N), it is determined whether the acquired big hit random number value is a small hit according to whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. The small hit determination process (step Y299) is performed.
Then, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is a small hit (step Y300; Y), the small hit information is overwritten in the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step Y291. Save (step Y301) and end the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is not a small hit (
In step Y300; N), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area and the small hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit judgment process]
FIG. 28 shows the jackpot determination process (steps Y285, Y296) in the above-mentioned jackpot flag 1 setting process and jackpot flag 2 setting process. In this jackpot judgment process, first
The lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step Y311), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y317), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for the big hit has been missed. On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312; N).
), It is determined whether or not the special figure is in high probability (step Y313).

Then, when the special figure is in high probability (step Y313; Y), the upper limit determination value in high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step Y314), and the value of the target jackpot random number is the upper limit. It is determined whether it is larger than the determination value (step Y316). Further, when the special figure is not in the high probability (step Y313; N), the upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step Y315), and the value of the target jackpot random number is the upper limit determination. Determine if it is greater than the value (
Step Y316).

If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y317), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y31).
6; N), that is, in the case of a big hit, a big hit is set as a determination result (step Y).
318), the jackpot determination process is terminated.

[Small hit judgment processing]
FIG. 29 shows a small hit determination process (step Y29) in the above-mentioned big hit flag 2 setting process.
9) was shown. In this small hit determination process, first, it is determined whether the value of the target large hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321). The small hit means that the big hit random number (the same random number as the big hit determination) matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit. Further, the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value do not overlap.

When the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; Y), that is, when it is not a small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y323), and the small hit determination process is terminated. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for small hits has been missed. When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; N), it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y321; N).
Step Y322).

If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y322; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y323), and the small hit determination process is terminated. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y322; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the determination result (step Y324), and the small hit determination process is performed. finish.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 30 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process.
246) was shown. In this special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y331), and if it is a big hit (step Y331; Y), the special figure 1
Load the jackpot symbol random number from the jackpot symbol random number storage area (for 1 hold number) (step Y3)
32). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step Y333), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y333).
Step Y334). The jackpot type is selected by this process. It should be noted that the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol area when the special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game. This is because there is a possibility that the result will be forcibly removed.

After that, the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y335), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y335).
Step Y336). The stop symbol pattern is a special figure display (here, special figure 1 display 51).
This is for setting the stop symbol at the display device 41 and the stop symbol at the display device 41. Next, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (step Y337), and the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired to obtain the number of special figure 1 rounds. Save in the upper limit information area (step Y338), acquire the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number, save it in the special drawing 1 large winning opening opening information area (step Y339), and move to step Y340. .. This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state.

On the other hand, when it is not a big hit (step Y331; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y344), and the loss stop symbol pattern is set in the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern area. Save (step Y345). Next, the decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared and saved in the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y340). As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set. After that, the effect command setting process (step Y341) is performed. As a result, the decorative special figure 1 command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y342), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y343), and the special figure 1 Ends the stop symbol setting process.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
In FIG. 31, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process is shown.
266) was shown. The special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is the same as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process for the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step Y361), and when it is a jackpot (step Y3).
In 61; Y), the jackpot symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step Y362). Next, set the special figure 2 jackpot symbol table (step Y).
363), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y364). The jackpot type is selected by this process.
The stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 2 stop symbol area when the special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game. This is because there is a possibility that the result will be forcibly removed.

After that, the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y365), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y365).
Step Y366). The stop symbol pattern is a special figure display (here, special figure 2 display 52).
This is for setting the stop symbol at the display device 41 and the stop symbol at the display device 41. Next, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (step Y367), and the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired to obtain the number of special figure 2 rounds. Save in the upper limit information area (step Y368), acquire the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number, save it in the special drawing 2 large winning opening opening information area (step Y369), and move to step Y370. .. This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state.

On the other hand, when it is not a big hit (step Y361; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y375), and when it is a small hit (step Y375; Y), the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number. Load the small hit symbol random number from the storage area (for 1 hold number) (step Y37)
6). Next, the special figure 2 small hit symbol table is set (step Y377), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y378). The small hit type is selected by this process. After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y).
379), the process proceeds to step Y370.

If the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y375; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y380), and the miss stop symbol pattern is set as a special figure. 2 Save in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y381). Next, the decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared and saved in the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y370). As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set. After that, the effect command setting process (step Y371) is performed. As a result, the decorative special figure 2 command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y372).
, Special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for hold number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y373), special figure 2 small hit symbol random number storage area (for hold number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y374), special figure 2 FIG. 2 The stop symbol setting process is terminated.

Here, the relationship between the stop symbol pattern and the decorative special figure command (decorative special figure 1 command, decorative special figure 2 command) will be described. FIG. 32A shows the ROM 111 of the game control device 100.
The decorative special figure command table that defines the relationship between the stop symbol pattern stored in B and the decorative special figure command is shown. The name of the stop symbol pattern is "stop symbol pattern * (* is a number)", and the numbers are numbered in order from 0. This number is called a stop symbol number, and is a unique number that is a unique number for each stop symbol pattern.

In FIGS. 30 and 31, in the case of a big hit, the stop symbol number corresponding to the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number or the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number is selected, and in the case of a small hit, the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number is selected. The corresponding stop symbol number is selected, and in the case of an outlier, the outlier stop symbol number is selected. The special figure 1 big hit symbol random number, the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number, and the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number are consecutive numerical values in a predetermined range, and the stop symbol number corresponding to the numerical value randomly extracted from them is selected. It has become like. By setting these symbol random numbers into continuous numerical values in a predetermined range, it becomes easy to understand the definition of the random number update process and the association with the stop symbol, and it becomes easy to handle in the development of the program.

In this embodiment, since there is only one type of small hit, it is not necessary to use the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number, but when there are multiple types of small hits, the value of the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number. The stop symbol number will be selected based on. Further, it can be said that the selection by the symbol random number is not performed for the deviation, but the selection is made by the jackpot random number to obtain the deviation result. The jackpot random number is also a continuous numerical value in a predetermined range, and the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is selected based on the numerical value randomly extracted from this.

The stop symbol number is a continuous value from 0 to 7, while the value of the command associated with each stop symbol pattern is a discontinuous value. This is the effect control device 3
This is because 00 can be commonly used by a plurality of types of game control devices 100 having different types of information to be transmitted, and possesses data corresponding to all the information that can be transmitted from the usable game control device 100. be.

Examples of the plurality of types of game control devices 100 having different types of information to be transmitted include those of the same model but having different specifications such as a jackpot probability. In this case, there are some common parts and different parts regarding the selectable effects and jackpot types, and the effect control device 300 stores all the data, and the game control device 100 corresponds to the one used by itself. Only the information that has been sent will be sent. Of course, the game control device 10 with different specifications of the same model
It is not limited to 0, and may be used by the game control device 100 of another model, and all the data of the game control device 100 to be used may be stored.

FIG. 32 (b) shows a table that defines the relationship between the stop symbol stored in the PROM 321 of the effect control device 300 and the decorative special figure command. 00 for the effect control device 300
A stop symbol is assigned to each of the consecutive command values from H to 0FH. In the game control device 100 of this embodiment, only seven of these stop symbols are used, and the stop symbols shown by shading are not used. The shaded stop symbol is used in another game control device 100 having a different type of information to be transmitted.

That is, in a group in which the type of information is a stop symbol, the value of the command associated with each of the plurality of information included in one group is within the range defined by the group (here, 00H to 0FH). It is a value, and the range is set to be a range that is the number of types of information (here, 16) included in the group that can be used by a plurality of game control devices 100 having different types of information to be transmitted. Further, although the range of command values and the number of types of information match here, the range of command values may be wider and include unused command values. The value of the command that is not used is a preliminary value, and if it is used when the number of stopped symbols increases in the development process, it is not necessary to change the value of the command of another group, and the efficiency of program development is improved. Can be done.

In this way, the effect control device 300 defines all the stop symbols that can be set by the game control device 100 that can be used, and assigns a decorative special figure command to these so as to have continuous values. As a result, the data of the effect control device 300 can be used by a plurality of game control devices 100 without changing the data, and the versatility is enhanced. Further, if the stop symbol stored in the effect control device 300 is used in the design stage of the game control device 100, the effect control device 300
There is no need to change the data of, and the efficiency of development can be improved.

In the game control device 100, only the stop symbols used by the game control device 100 are defined, and the stop symbol numbers are assigned so as to be consecutive numbers. Then, the stop symbol number, which is a continuous predetermined range value, is selected based on the symbol random number or the jackpot random number, which is a continuous predetermined range value.
As described above, by making the information of continuous values used in the internal processing of the game control device 100, the design of the control processing becomes easy. For example, by setting the stop symbol numbers to consecutive numbers, it is not necessary to consider missing numbers in other processes of the game control device 100 that refers to the stop symbol numbers, and the design becomes easy. If the number of stop symbols increases or decreases at the design stage, it is necessary to change the stop symbol number, but the work is easy because there are few types of stop symbols.

As shown in FIG. 32 (b), in the effect control device 300, a decorative special figure command is assigned so as to be a continuous value for the information of the stop symbol in the effect control device 300. Therefore, in the game control device 100, the value of the decorative special figure command transmitted to the effect control device 300 is converted by the decorative special figure command table so as to be a value according to the definition in the effect control device 300. .. That is, each control device can handle information as a continuous value in its own processing. Then, when the information is transmitted to another control device, the conversion process is performed so that the value is in line with the definition at the destination. This facilitates the design of the program in each control device.

FIG. 33 is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process executed by the CPU 111A of the game control device 100. Each program list of the game control program executed by the game control device 100 is Z80 which is an 8-bit microprocessor.
It is a list of instructions in assembly language (source code) similar to the above, and one pair for machine language instructions (machine code) stored in ROM111b (game control program storage means) except for pseudo instructions (instructions for assembler). Corresponds to 1.

From the left side, the description of the instruction (code) in each program list is the "line number" attached for convenience, the "mnemonic" indicating the operation content (operation content) of the instruction, the "operand" of the instruction target, and the convenience of explanation. It is divided into "comments" attached for. The instructions in the program list are basically executed from the top to the bottom of the program list in the order of line numbers (from small to large) unless there is an instruction to call a subroutine or a jump instruction (branch instruction).

The code of line numbers 1020 and 1030 corresponds to the process of step Y331, determines whether the jackpot flag is stored in the jackpot flag 1 area, and branches the process according to the determination result. The code of line number 1060 corresponds to the process of step Y332, and loads the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number into the A register. After that, the process of selecting the stop symbol number from the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number is performed.

The codes of line numbers 1230 to 1280 correspond to the processing of steps Y340 and Y341. At line number 1230, the start address D_TZ_COM of the decorative special figure command table shown in FIG. 32 (a) is loaded into the HL register, and at line number 1240, the stop symbol pattern (stop symbol number) is loaded into the A register. The command value corresponding to the stop symbol number is stored in the A register by the processing of the line number 1250, and the command value of the A register is loaded in the C register at the line number 1260. This command value is a value corresponding to the ACTION of the decorative special figure 1 command.

At line number 1270, the value corresponding to the MODE of the special figure 1 command is loaded in the B register, and at line number 1280, the values of the B register and the C register are saved in the special figure 1 command area. At line number 1290, the effect command setting process is performed. By the above processing, the stop symbol number is converted into the decorative special figure 1 command and transmitted to the effect control device 300.

In the above description, the effect control device 300 can be commonly used by a plurality of types of game control devices 100 having different types of information to be transmitted, but the effect control device 300 is only a single game control device 100. It may be possible to use it. Even in this case, the game control device 100
It may have data corresponding to a value other than the value (command) that can be transmitted from. Further, even if the effect control device 300 can be commonly used by a plurality of types of game control devices 100 having different types of information to be transmitted, a value that can be transmitted from all the usable game control devices 100 ( You may have data corresponding to values other than command).

In this way, the value that the effect control device 300 can transmit from the corresponding game control device 100 (
As a case of holding data corresponding to a value other than the command), there is a case where the effect control device 300 leaves the data that is no longer used in the development process. Further, there is also a case where a part or all the data of the effect control device 300 is set as a common specification and a part of the data required according to the gaming machine to be used is used. In this way, the effect control device 300
By keeping the data corresponding to the values (commands) other than the values (commands) that can be transmitted from the corresponding game control device 100, it is possible to save the trouble of deleting and recombining the data and improve the efficiency of development. Can be done.

Even when the game control device 100 has data corresponding to a value other than the value (command) that can be transmitted from the corresponding game control device 100, the game control device 100 has the effect control device 300 for each stop symbol pattern. The value of the associated command is used, and the stop symbol number used in the own process is a continuous value. For example, the command and the stop symbol number as shown in FIG. 32 are associated with each other. The command value is also associated with the data not used by the corresponding game control device 100 (the shaded portion in FIG. 32 (b)), and the value is not used by the game control device 100 as a command. Value (eg 0
Although it is 5H), it is a value within the range (00H to 0FH) pre-assigned as the command range for the group to which the data belongs.

From the above, a game in which a game is executed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is controlled in a game machine that generates a state advantageous to the player. The game control means includes a control means (game control device 100) and a slave control means (effect control device 300) that controls based on the information transmitted from the game control means, and the game control means preliminarily applies to each of the transmittable information. It is configured to send information (eg, stop symbol information) to the slave control means using the associated value (command), and the information is classified into groups defined by the type of information into one group. The value associated with each of the plurality of included information is a value within the range defined for each group, and only a part of the values within the range is used. Therefore, by allocating a range of values that is larger than the number of information used in one group, it is not necessary to change the values of other groups even if the number of information increases at the design stage, and development efficiency Can be enhanced.

In addition, the range of values is set to be a range that is equal to or greater than the number of types of information included in the group, and only the values in the range corresponding to the information used by the user are used. .. Therefore, by allocating a range of values that is larger than the number of information used in one group, it is not necessary to change the values of other groups even if the number of information increases in development, and development efficiency can be improved. Can be enhanced.

In addition, the range of values is a range that is equal to or greater than the number of types of information included in the group that can be used by a plurality of game control means having different types of information to be transmitted, and the values within the range are used by themselves. It means that only the value corresponding to the information to be used is used. Therefore, by allocating a range of values that is larger than the number of information used in one group, even if the number of information increases in the development of multiple game control means with different types of information to be transmitted, other groups There is no need to change the value of, and development efficiency can be improved.

Further, the slave control means is configured to control using one data corresponding to the value transmitted from the game control means from among the plurality of possessed data, and the data corresponding to one group. As a result, the group has a larger number of data than the number of values that can be transmitted from the game control means. Therefore, the data of one subordinate control means can be used in common. Further, in development, it is possible to select whether or not to use the data within the range of the data, and it is possible to improve the efficiency of development.

Further, the slave control means can be commonly used by a plurality of game control means having different types of information to be transmitted, and possesses data corresponding to all the values that can be transmitted from the plurality of game control means. Become. Therefore, one subordinate control means can be used in common, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

In addition, the information included in the group and used by itself can be assigned a unique number, which is a continuous number, separately from the value, and the unique number can be used to execute processing related to the game. When selecting one piece of information from each information contained in, a lottery process is performed in which a numerical value is randomly extracted from a continuous predetermined range of numerical values, and the unique number is selected based on the numerical value, and the selection is performed by the lottery process. It means that the processing related to the game is executed based on the unique number, and the value corresponding to the unique number is transmitted to the slave control means. Therefore, by using consecutive numerical values or unique numbers in the internal processing of the game control means, it is possible to facilitate the handling of the game control means at the time of development and improve the efficiency of development.

Further, the slave control means associates continuous values within the range with the information contained in one group, and the game control means converts the unique number into the associated value in the data of the slave control means. It means that the conversion process is performed and the value obtained by the conversion process is transmitted to the slave control means. Therefore, by using continuous values in the internal processing of the slave control means, it is possible to facilitate understanding at the time of development of the program of the slave control means and improve the efficiency of development. That is, the game control means and the slave control means are designed to perform processing using consecutive numerical values in the internal processing, and when transmitting information, they are converted into values according to the definition of the destination. I try to send it.

[Special Figure 1 Information Setting Process]
FIG. 34 shows the special figure 1 information setting process (step Y24) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process.
7) was shown. In this special figure 1 information setting process, first, the fluctuation pattern selection information table is set (step Y401), and the first half offset data corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern,
The second half offset data is acquired (step Y402), and the special figure 1 jackpot, that is, the special figure 1
It is determined whether the stop symbol pattern is a jackpot stop symbol pattern (step Y403).
In the case of a special figure 1 big hit (step Y403; Y), the process proceeds to step Y405.

If the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y403; N), the special figure 1 hold number is added to the first half offset data to convert the value (step Y404). Then, the first half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y405). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is later used to select a fluctuation group.

After that, the latter half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y405).
), End the special figure 1 information setting process. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. The fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (type of reach (including no reach)), and is later used to select a fluctuation group.
In this way, in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the fluctuation pattern is determined in consideration of the special figure 1 hold number only in the first half fluctuation pattern in the case of a miss, and in the case of a big hit, consider the special figure 1 hold number. The fluctuation pattern is determined without.

[Special Figure 2 Information Setting Process]
FIG. 35 shows the special figure 2 information setting process (step Y26) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process.
7) was shown. In this special figure 2 information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure has a low probability and no time reduction (during a normal gaming state) (step Y421). Special figure Low probability & No time saving If not in the middle (
In step Y421; N), it is determined whether or not the time reduction final variation is performed (step Y427).
.. Here, the special figure 2 variable display game to be started from now on is 100 from the end of the special gaming state.
In the case of the special figure fluctuation display game of the number of times (number of times of support), it is determined that the final fluctuation is shortened in time.

Then, in the case of the time reduction final variation (step Y427; Y), step Y42
Move to 8. If the time is not the final variation (step Y427; N), the variation pattern selection information table is set (step Y423), and the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern are acquired. (Step Y424),
The process proceeds to step Y425.

On the other hand, when the special figure has a low probability and no time reduction (step Y421; Y), it is determined whether the final variation has a high probability (step Y427). Here, when the fall lottery for the special figure 2 variation display game to be started is won, it is determined that the final variation has a high probability.
Then, in the case of a high-probability final variation (step Y427; Y), the first half offset data and the second half offset data for the final variation are set (step Y428), and step Y
Move to 425.
Further, when it is not a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y427; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is a big hit (step Y429). And when it is not a special figure 2 big hit (step Y42)
In 9; N), the first half offset data for the low probability special figure 2 miss / small hit is set (step Y430), and the second half offset data for the special figure 2 length variation is set (step Y432).
), The process proceeds to step Y425.

Further, in the case of the special figure 2 big hit (step Y429; Y), the first half offset data for the special figure 2 big hit at low probability is set (step Y431), and the second half offset data for the special figure 2 length variation is set. (Step Y432). Then, the first half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y425). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. This fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is used later for selecting a fluctuation group.

After that, the latter half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y426).
), End the special figure 2 information setting process. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. The fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (type of reach (including no reach)), and is later used to select a fluctuation group.
As described above, in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the fluctuation pattern is determined without considering the number of reserved special figures 2.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation pattern setting process]
FIG. 36 shows the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y249) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process. The fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the reach state to the end of the special map fluctuation display game. It consists of a pattern, and the latter half fluctuation pattern is set first, then the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern is selected by combining these.

In this special figure 1 variation pattern setting process, first, the variation group address table is set (step Y451), the address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y452), and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process is performed. The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared from the variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the holding number 1) of FIG. 1 (step Y453).
Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is off, that is, the stop symbol pattern is the off-stop symbol pattern (step Y454), and when the special figure 1 is off (step Y454; Y), 2
Byte distribution processing (step Y455) is performed. If the special figure 1 is not out of alignment (step Y454; N), the distribution process (step Y456) is performed.

In the present embodiment, the structure of the latter half variable group table is different between the hit type and the missed type. Specifically, the size for hitting is 1 byte size, and the size for losing is 2 bytes. Since the rate of occurrence of hits is lower than the rate of occurrence of loss and even one byte is sufficient, the size of hits is one byte from the viewpoint of saving data capacity. Therefore, at the time of hitting, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used. In addition, the rate of occurrence of loss is higher than the rate of occurrence of hit, and in order to enable a wider variety of production, the size for loss is 2 bytes.

Then, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of distribution is acquired and prepared (step Y457), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of hold 1) of the special figure 1. And prepare (step Y458). Next, a distribution process (step Y459) is performed, and the latter half variable number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half variable number area (step Y460). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

Next, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step Y461), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the second half fluctuation number determined as the fluctuation distribution information 1 (step Y462). Then, the address of the first half variable selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (
Step Y463), the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded and prepared from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the holding number 1) of the special figure 1 (step Y464).
After that, the distribution process (step Y465) is performed, and the first half variation number obtained as a result of distribution is acquired (step Y466). This process sets the first half variation pattern. Then, the fluctuation pattern number is generated by adding the first half fluctuation number and the second half fluctuation number (step Y467), and the fluctuation pattern number is saved in the fluctuation pattern number area (step Y46).
8), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process is completed. As a result, the fluctuation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be started from now on will be set.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process]
FIG. 37 shows the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y269) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this special figure 2 variation pattern setting process, first, the variation group address table is set (step Y471), and the address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y472). The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared from the variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of hold 1) in FIG. 2 (step Y).
473).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is off, that is, the stop symbol pattern is the off-stop symbol pattern (step Y474), and when the special figure 2 is off (step Y474; Y), 2
Byte distribution processing (step Y475) is performed. If the special figure 2 is not out of alignment (step Y474; N), the distribution process (step Y476) is performed.

Then, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of distribution is acquired and prepared (step Y477), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of hold 1) of the special figure 2. And prepare (step Y478). Next, a distribution process (step Y479) is performed, and the latter half variable number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half variable number area (step Y480). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

Next, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step Y481), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the second half fluctuation number determined as the fluctuation distribution information 1 (step Y482). Then, the address of the first half variable selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (
Step Y483), the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded and prepared from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of hold 1) of the special figure 2 (step Y484).
After that, the distribution process (step Y485) is performed, and the first half variation number obtained as a result of distribution is acquired (step Y486). By this process, the first half fluctuation pattern is set. Then, the fluctuation pattern number is generated by adding the first half fluctuation number and the second half fluctuation number (step Y487), and the fluctuation pattern number is saved in the fluctuation pattern number area (step Y4).
88), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process is completed. This is the special figure 2 that will be started from now on.
Fluctuation display The fluctuation pattern for the entire period of the game will be set.

[Variation start information setting process]
FIG. 38 shows the fluctuation start information setting processing (steps Y250, Y270) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing. In this fluctuation start information setting process, first, the random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of the target fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step Y551). Next, the variation pattern number correction table is set (step Y552), the subtraction value corresponding to the variation pattern number is acquired (step Y553), and the subtraction value is subtracted from the variation pattern number to correct (step Y554). After that, the fluctuation time value table is set (step Y555), and the fluctuation time value corresponding to the corrected fluctuation pattern number is acquired (step Y555).
Step Y556), the fluctuation time value is saved in the target special figure game processing timer area (step Y557).

In the special figure 2 variation display game in the normal gaming state, a long variation with a very long variation time is set. In this case, the above added value is the specified time (here, 60,000 m).
The remainder time (seconds) excluding the time that can be timed using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times the time is performed.
(Time less than 60,000 msec) is calculated as an additional value.

After that, it is determined whether the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y558), and if the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y558; Y), the process proceeds to step Y562. Further, when the information of the special figure 1 is not set (step Y558; N), that is, when the information of the special figure 2 is being set, it is determined whether the length variation of the special figure 2 has started (step Y559). The long variation is a variation pattern set in the normal gaming state of the special figure 2 variation display game, and is determined by the number of the set variation pattern.

Then, when it is not the start of the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 (step Y559; N), 0 is set as the special figure 2.
Save in the repeat count area of the game processing timer (step Y560). In addition, special figure 2
In the case of the start of the long fluctuation of (step Y559; Y), 9 is saved in the repeat count region of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y561).

After that, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the variation pattern number before correction is prepared (step Y562), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern number before correction is prepared (step Y563), and an effect command setting is performed. The process (step Y564) is performed. Next, the number of pending targets is updated by -1 (step Y566), the contents of the target random number storage area are shifted (step Y566), the free area after the shift is cleared (step Y567), and the fluctuation start information is set. End the process.

In the present embodiment, the number of repetitions is set for the length variation of the special figure 2 in order to vary the time that is not enough for the 2-byte timer. In the fluctuation start information setting process, 600 is added as an addition result.
The timer for 00msec, the number of repetitions of 9 is saved, the timer is subtracted by the timer interrupt processing, and when the time is up, the number of repetitions is subtracted by 1 and the game processing timer is 60000m.
Set the seconds. As a result, the fluctuation time of the long fluctuation in Special Figure 2 is 10 minutes (= 60,000 ms ×).
10). Since the timer interrupt cycle is 4 msec, it can be set up to about 262 seconds with 2 bytes, but for ease of understanding, it can be expressed by multiplying by 60 seconds.

Here, the details of the process of acquiring the fluctuation time value from the selected special figure fluctuation pattern will be described. FIG. 39 shows a fluctuation time value table that defines the relationship between the special figure fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time value. The name of the special figure fluctuation pattern is "special figure fluctuation pattern * (* is a number)", and the numbers are numbered in order from 1. This number is called a variation pattern number, and is a unique number that is a unique number for each special figure variation pattern. FIG. 36
And in FIG. 37, the special figure variation pattern of the variation pattern number corresponding to the value obtained by adding the first half variation number and the second half variation number selected by the variation pattern random number is selected.

In this embodiment, some of the numbers are missing, for example, the special figure fluctuation patterns 30 to 33. In FIG. 39, a blank is provided so that the missing number portion can be easily understood, but in the actual data, there is no blank and the data is stored. At the beginning of development, there are no missing numbers and there are special figure fluctuation patterns, and each special figure fluctuation pattern is numbered in order from 1.
The missing number was caused by the deletion of the special figure fluctuation pattern in the process of subsequent development. Due to such a missing number, the gaming machine of the present embodiment has up to the special figure variation pattern 82, but the number of special figure variation patterns is 70. By deleting and packing unused data in this way, the area of ROM 111B can be used efficiently without waste.

As described above, in the selection of the special figure fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern number is calculated from the first half fluctuation number and the second half fluctuation number. Therefore, if the fluctuation pattern number is changed along with the deletion of the special figure fluctuation pattern, the first half fluctuation number and the second half fluctuation number also need to be changed, which complicates the correction work. In particular, the number of special symbol fluctuation patterns is larger than that of the stop symbol pattern, and the correction work is complicated. For this reason, the variation pattern number is not changed and is left as a missing number in order to improve the efficiency of development.

When acquiring the fluctuation time value from the fluctuation pattern number, the fluctuation time value is acquired by referring to the selected fluctuation pattern number with reference to the fluctuation time value table shown in FIG. 39. However, since the missing numbers are filled in the data stored in the ROM 111B of the game control device 100 so as not to provide a blank line, the special figure fluctuation pattern number corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern and the corresponding There is a discrepancy between the order counted from the top of the fluctuation time value table of the special figure fluctuation pattern. For example, in the information of the special figure fluctuation pattern 34, since the special figure fluctuation patterns 30 to 33 are missing numbers, the rank from the top of the fluctuation time value table is the 30th position, so that the rank and the special figure fluctuation pattern number There is a gap between the two. Therefore, when acquiring the fluctuation time value, the fluctuation pattern number is corrected to be a correction number, and the correction number is referred to the fluctuation time value table to acquire the fluctuation time value.

FIG. 40 shows a variation pattern number correction table for correcting variation pattern numbers. Since the number of missing numbers in the previous numbers differs depending on the fluctuation pattern number to be corrected, the subtraction value is defined according to the fluctuation pattern number to be corrected. The correction number can be calculated by subtracting the subtraction value from the fluctuation pattern number to be corrected, and this correction number becomes the order from the top of the fluctuation time value table. For example, when the fluctuation pattern number is 34 to 51, the order is obtained from the top of the fluctuation time value table by subtracting 4 which is a minute of the special figure fluctuation pattern 30 to 33 which is a missing number.

In this way, for the special symbol fluctuation pattern, the response to the missing number is performed by the correction process by calculation, and for the stopped symbol pattern, the response to the missing number is performed by replacing the table. Since the number of stop symbol patterns is small, there is no problem even if they are replaced by a table. However, because there are many special figure fluctuation patterns,
If the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern number and the correction number is replaced by using a table that defines all the fluctuation pattern numbers, a table with a large amount of data is required. For this reason, the special figure fluctuation pattern is dealt with by correction processing by calculation to prevent an increase in the amount of data, so that the area of ROM 111B can be used efficiently.

FIG. 41 is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the fluctuation start information setting process executed by the CPU 111A of the game control device 100. The codes of line numbers 2020 to 2040 correspond to the processing of step Y551. The code of line number 2090 is step Y5.
Corresponding to the processing of 52, the start address D_ of the fluctuation pattern number correction table is stored in the HL register.
Load HEN_NUM_REV. The code of line numbers 2100 to 2200 corresponds to the process of step Y553, and in line number 2100, the numerical value corresponding to the label R_HEN_NUM + 00H is loaded into the A register. The label R_HEN_NUM + 00H indicates the address of the RAM 111C that stores the variation pattern number selected based on the random number. After that, A
The variation pattern number loaded in the register is sequentially referred to the comparison value of the variation pattern number correction table, and when it is determined that the row number 2150 is less than the comparison value, the subtraction value of the corresponding address in the row number 2200 is E. Load into the register.

The code at line number 2210 corresponds to the process of step Y554 and subtracts the subtraction value loaded in the E register from the variation pattern number loaded in the A register. Line number 2220
Corresponds to the process of step Y555, and loads the start address D_HEN_TIM of the variable time value table into the HL register. The code at line number 2230 is step Y556.
Corresponds to the process of, the 2-byte data acquisition process corresponding to the label P_GET_WORD is called, and the variation time value corresponding to the corrected variation pattern number is acquired from the variation time value table. The acquired time value is stored in the HL register. The code at line number 2240 is in step Y
Corresponding to the processing of 557, the fluctuation time value stored in the HL register is loaded into the address stored in the IY register. The address of the special figure game processing timer area is stored in the IY register here.

The correction number obtained by the correction process may be stored in the RAM 111C so that it can be used in another process. Moreover, even if the correction processing is performed, the fluctuation pattern number before the correction is R.
It is in a state of being stored in AM111C. This is because the fluctuation pattern number may be used in other processes such as being used for transmitting information to the effect control device 300 as shown below. Further, by storing the variation pattern number in the RAM 111C, the variation pattern number can be maintained even after the end of the variation time, and the variation pattern number can be maintained until the next special figure variation display game. This makes it possible to select the stop time by the fluctuation pattern number and to select the production of the next special figure fluctuation display game according to the fluctuation pattern number of the previous special figure fluctuation display game, which makes it possible to enjoy the game. Can be improved.

Information on the special figure variation pattern is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by transmitting the variation command set in steps Y562 and 563 of FIG. 38. At this time, the information of the fluctuation pattern number before the correction is transmitted instead of the correction number. Specifically, the variable command ACTI
The ON value is used as the fluctuation pattern number. Therefore, there is a missing number in the value transmitted to the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 performs control processing without correcting the variation pattern number acquired from the received variation command. On the data stored in the PROM 321 of the effect control device 300, the information of the special figure fluctuation pattern, which is a missing number in the game control device 100, is also stored without being deleted. Therefore, the variation pattern number and the order from the beginning in the table storing the data corresponding to each special figure variation pattern are matched. Since the PROM 321 of the effect control device 300 has a sufficient capacity, there is no problem even if the data corresponding to the missing special figure fluctuation pattern is left, and the burden of control is increased by not performing the correction process. It can be mitigated.

The effect control device 300 is a plurality of types of game control devices 1 having different types of information to be transmitted.
It has data corresponding to all the information that can be commonly used in 00 and can be transmitted from the usable game control device 100. Therefore, the special figure variation pattern that is absent in the game control device 100 of the present embodiment is not only a special figure variation pattern that is no longer used in the development process, but also is used in another game control device 100. It may be a special figure fluctuation pattern. In any case, the game control device 100 uses a unique number (variation pattern number) attached to the data held by the effect control device 300, and the unique number not used by the game control device 100 itself is treated as a missing number. Then, in the processing in the game control device 100, the correction number, which is a serial number without a missing number, is calculated and used by the correction processing.

In addition, in the PROM 321 of the effect control device 300, it is assumed that there is data corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern that is a missing number, but the special figure fluctuation pattern that is not used in any of the game control devices 100 is deleted and blank data is used. It is also good. That is, it suffices if the fluctuation pattern number and the rank from the beginning (added value of the address) in the table storing the data corresponding to each special figure fluctuation pattern match or have a proportional relationship.

From the above, a game in which a game is executed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is controlled in a game machine that generates a state advantageous to the player. The game control means includes a control means (game control device 100) and a slave control means (effect control device 300) that controls based on the information transmitted from the game control means, and the game control means preliminarily applies to each of the transmittable information. Information (for example, special figure fluctuation pattern information) is configured to be transmitted to the slave control means using the associated value (command), and the information is classified into a group defined by the type of information and is one. The value associated with each of the multiple pieces of information contained in the group is a value within the range defined for each group, and only some of the values within the range are used. Become. Therefore, by allocating a range of values that is larger than the number of information used in one group, it is not necessary to change the values of other groups even if the number of information increases at the design stage, and development efficiency Can be enhanced.

Further, the group includes a variable group including information about the execution mode of the game (special figure fluctuation pattern) and a symbol group including information about the result mode of the game (stop symbol information). , The game control means selects one piece of information from the information contained in the variable system group and sends it to the slave control means at each start of the game, and also selects one piece of information from the information contained in the symbol system group. It means that it is transmitted to the slave control means. The contents of these groups are often changed in the development of gaming machines, and at least each of these groups can be assigned a range of values that is larger than the number of information used for the group. Even if the number of information increases in the design stage, it is not necessary to change the values of other groups, and the efficiency of development can be improved.

In addition, a game control means for comprehensively controlling a game in a game machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. The information used by the game control means in the processing related to the game is classified into groups defined by the type of information, and each information included in the group is assigned a unique number, which is a different number for each information, and is one group. The unique number of each information included in is a discontinuous number, and the game control means corrects the unique number so that it becomes a continuous number for all the information included in the group. Is feasible, and it is possible to perform processing related to the game using the correction number. Therefore, by using a continuous correction number in the internal processing of the game control means, it is possible to facilitate the handling of the game control means at the time of development and to improve the efficiency of development.

Further, a slave control means that controls based on the information transmitted from the game control means is provided, and the game control means transmits the information to the slave control means using the values associated with each of the information in advance. It is configured and the values are assigned corresponding to the unique numbers. When the number of information increases or decreases in the design stage, the correction number changes but the unique number does not change. Therefore, by associating the value with the unique number, it is not necessary to change the value mapping by increasing or decreasing the number of information, and it is not necessary to change the data of the slave control means, so that the efficiency of development is improved. Can be done.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is,
Based on the first start storage stored in the first start storage means, the game control device 100 starts the first variation display game with the result and variation mode information of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game). It is the first decision-making tool that can be decided before. In addition, the game control device 100
Based on the second start storage stored in the second start storage means, the result of the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) and the variation mode information can be determined before the start of the second variation display game. Make a possible second decision. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of the identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

From the above, the starting winning opening 36 is arranged at a position where the game ball fired on one side of the game area 32 can win, and the normal variable winning device 37 is the game ball fired on the other side of the game area 32. Is arranged at a position where a prize can be won, and the variation mode information of the variation display game includes information on the variation time in which the execution time of the variation display game can be specified, and the second determination is made in the normal state (normal game state). The variable time that can be determined as the variable time of the second variable display game by the means is longer than the variable time that can be determined as the variable time of the first variable display game by the first determination means. Become.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Decorate special figure variable display Set detailed production contents in the game. Information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information on the number of start memories (holding number), a decorative special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure fluctuation display game. Examples include variable commands that contain information about patterns. By transmitting the decorative special figure command before the variable command, the processing by the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

That is, the game control device 100 forms the first variable display game execution control means capable of controlling the execution of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the determination result of the first determination means. .. Further, it can be said that the first variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control related to the first variable display game from the whole of the special figure 1 game processing.
Further, the game control device 100 serves as a second variation display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the determination result of the second determination means. .. Further, it can be said that the second variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control related to the second variable display game from the whole of the special figure 2 game processing.

Further, the game control device 100 controls the result and variation mode information of the first variation display game determined by the first determination means and the result and variation mode information of the second variation display game determined by the second determination means. As a transmission means capable of transmitting to the effect control means (effect control device 300). Further, when the game control device 100 starts measuring the fluctuation time for each of the first fluctuation display game and the second fluctuation display game according to the start of the fluctuation display game, and the measurement time has elapsed. It serves as a measurement means for ending the measurement of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game.

In the special figure 2 variation display game in the normal gaming state, a long variation with a very long variation time is set, but in this case, the information about the variation time is not transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the variation time is long variation. You may want to send a command that only indicates that. In the case of long fluctuation, it is sufficient to simply display the fluctuation, and it is not necessary to determine the effect in detail. Therefore, the effect control device 300 starts the variation display based on receiving the command of long variation.
The fluctuation time is managed only by the game control device 100, the stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the end of the variation time, and the effect control device 300 stops the variation display based on the reception of the stop command. To do so. By doing so, the effect control device 300
It is possible to reduce the burden of control in.

[Time reduction fluctuation frequency update process]
FIG. 42 shows the time-reduced fluctuation number update processing (steps Y251 and Y271) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing. In this time reduction fluctuation frequency update process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure is in the high probability (during the high probability state) (step Y571), and when the special figure is in the high probability (step Y571; Y), the time is reached. The shortened fluctuation count update process is terminated. Further, when the special figure is not in high probability (step Y571; N), it is determined whether the special figure time is shortened (step Y572). Then, when the special time is not shortened (step Y572; N).
) Ends the time reduction variation number update process. Further, when the special figure time reduction is in progress (step Y572; Y), the time reduction variation number is updated by -1 (step Y573), and it is determined whether the time reduction variation number is "0" (step Y574). ..

If the number of time reduction fluctuations is not "0" (step A754; N), the time reduction fluctuation number update process is terminated. Further, when the number of time reduction fluctuations becomes "0" (step Y57).
4; In Y), a signal relating to the end of the time saving state (for example, turning off the jackpot 2 signal) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y575), and a signal relating to the end of the time saving state (for example, the signal indicating the end of the time saving state) is saved.
Special symbol 1 variable time shortened state signal is turned off, special symbol 2 variable time shortened state signal is turned off,
Normal symbol 1 Turn off the fluctuation time shortening state signal, turn off the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal)
Is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y576).
Next, the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step Y577), and the special figure low probability & no time reduction flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y578).
), Save the normal map time reduction flag in the normal map game mode flag area (step Y579).
), Ends the time reduction fluctuation count update process.

[Special Figure 1 Processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 43 shows the special figure 1 changing process (step Y110) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process.
showed that. In this special figure 1 changing process, first, the number of times the symbol is fixed is updated by +1 (step Y621). Then, load the command from the decorative special figure 1 command area and prepare (
Step Y622) and the effect command setting process (step Y623) are performed.

Next, the decorative special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y624), and the effect command setting process (step Y625) is performed. Since the gaming machine of the present embodiment may be forcibly stopped before the fluctuation time set at the start of the fluctuation, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the fluctuation is stopped. .. Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y626). In this embodiment, for example, 600 in the case of an outlier.
The display time is set to m seconds, or 2000 m seconds in the case of a big hit.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is out of alignment, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is out of alignment (step Y627). If it is out of the special figure 1 (step Y627; Y), the process proceeds to step Y642. Further, when the special figure 1 is not out of alignment (step Y627;
N), that is, in the case of a big hit, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is also being executed (step Y628). Whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

Then, when the special figure 2 variation display game is not being executed (step Y628; Y), the process proceeds to step Y639. Further, when the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed (step Y628; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 display process is being performed (step Y629). That is, in this case, the special figure 2 being executed is based on the fact that the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a big hit.
This is a case where the variable display game is forcibly stopped due to a missed result. Note that even if the variable display game in Special Figure 2 has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

If the process during display of the special figure 2 is being performed (step Y639; Y), the process proceeds to step Y631. Further, when the special figure 2 display is not being processed (step Y629; N), the number of times the symbol is confirmed is updated by +1 (step Y630), and the special figure 1 is set as the display time of the special figure 2. Display time + Display time of 4 msec is set (step Y631). By setting the display time of the special figure 1 + the display time of 4 msec as the display time of the special figure 2, the display time of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 ends at the same time. Even if the special figure 2 variable display game is already in the display time, the display time is reset and a new display time is started. This resetting extends the stop display time, but may shorten it in some cases.

Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y632), and the decorative special figure 2 off-design command is set and prepared (step Y633). Then, the symbol command is saved in the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y634), and the effect command setting process (step Y635) is performed. After that, the decorative special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y636), the effect command setting process (step Y638) is performed, and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y638) is performed.

Then, the command is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y639), and the information is loaded from the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area. (Step Y640), the information is loaded from the special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area and saved in the large winning opening opening information area (step Y641). After that, the information is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y642), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y643) is performed to perform the special figure 1 stop symbol area.
Ends the process being displayed.

[Special Figure 2 Processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 44 shows the special figure 2 changing process (step Y143) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process.
showed that. In this special figure 2 changing process, first, the number of times the symbol is fixed is updated by +1 (step Y651). Then, load the command from the decorative special figure 2 command area and prepare (
Step Y652) and the effect command setting process (step Y653) are performed.

Next, the decorative special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y654), and the effect command setting process (step Y655) is performed. Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y656). In the present embodiment, for example, a display time of 600 msec in the case of a miss, 600 msec in the case of a big hit, and 136 msec in the case of a small hit is set.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is out of alignment, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is out of alignment (step Y657). If it is out of the special figure 2 (step Y657; Y), the process proceeds to step Y677. In addition, when the special figure 2 is not out of alignment (step Y657;
N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is also being executed (step Y658). Whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

Then, when the special figure 1 variable display game is not being executed (step Y658; N), the process proceeds to step Y673. Further, when the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (step Y658; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 big hit, that is, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (step Y659). ). Special figure 2 When it is not a big hit (step Y65)
9; N), that is, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set (step Y670), and the decorative special figure 1 interruption command is prepared (step Y671). ), Perform the effect command setting process (step Y672), and step Y673.
Move to.

That is, in this case, the running special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted based on the fact that the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a small hit. It should be noted that even if the variable display game of Special Figure 1 has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to interruption. The interrupted special figure 1 variable display game is restarted at the end of the special gaming state (second special gaming state) based on the small hit (second special result).

On the other hand, in the case of the special figure 2 big hit (step Y659; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 display processing is in progress (step Y660). That is, in this case, based on the fact that the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a big hit, the running special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a missed result. It should be noted that even if the variable display game of Special Figure 1 has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

If the process during display of Special Figure 1 is in progress (step Y660; Y), the process proceeds to step Y662. Further, when the special figure 1 display is not being processed (step Y660; N), the number of times the symbol is confirmed is updated by +1 (step Y661), and the special figure 2 is set as the display time of the special figure 2. Display time + Display time of 4 msec is set (step Y662). By setting the display time of the special figure 2 + the display time of 4 msec as the display time of the special figure 1, the display time of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 ends at the same time. Even if the special figure 1 variable display game is already in the display time, the display time is reset and a new display time is started. This resetting extends the stop display time, but may shorten it in some cases.

Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y663), and the decorative special figure 1 off-design command is set and prepared (step Y664). Then, the symbol command is saved in the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y665), and the effect command setting process (step Y666) is performed. After that, the decorative special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y667), the effect command setting process (step Y668) is performed, and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y669) is performed.

Then, the command is loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y673), and is the special figure 2 small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit. Determine (step Y674). In the case of a special figure 2 small hit (step Y674; Y), the process proceeds to step Y677. Also, if it is not a special figure 2 small hit (
Step Y674; N), that is, in the case of a big hit, the information is loaded from the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step Y675).
Special figure 2 Load information from the large winning opening opening information area and save it in the large winning opening opening information area (
Step Y676). After that, the information is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y677), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y678) is performed to perform the special figure 2 stop symbol area. Ends the process being displayed.

[Processing during display of special figure 1]
FIG. 45 shows the process during display of the special figure 1 in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process (step Y111).
showed that. In this special figure 1 display process, first, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y7).
51), clear the jackpot flag 1 area (step Y752). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is the big hit information (step Y753).
, When the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y753; Y), a test signal regarding the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the special figure 1 variation display game (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, the special symbol is turned on). (1 signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y754).
..

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is loaded and prepared from the hit symbol command area (step Y755), and the effect command setting process (step Y756) is prepared.
I do. After that, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y757), and an effect command setting process (step Y758) is performed.
Next, the signal corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of becoming a big hit in the special figure fluctuation display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y759). In the case of this embodiment
Two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability.

After that, the big hit fanfare time (for example, 100msec) corresponding to the big winning opening opening information
Is set (step Y760), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y761). Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y762), and the game is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y763). Further, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (step Y764) is performed to perform the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing.
Special figure 1 Displaying processing ends.

On the other hand, when the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y753; N), that is, the big hit flag 1
If it is out-of-order information, it is determined whether it is a high-probability final variation (step Y765), and if it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y765; N), it is determined whether it is a time-reduced final variation (step Y766). .. Here, when the fall lottery for the running special figure 1 variation display game is won, it is determined that the final variation has a high probability. Further, when the special figure 1 variation display game being executed is the special figure variation display game 100 times (the number of times of support) from the end of the special gaming state, it is determined that the final variation is shortened.

Then, if it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y765; N) and if it is not a time-reduced final variation (step Y766; N), the process proceeds to step Y774. Further, in the case of a high-probability final variation (step Y765; Y) or a time-reduced final variation (step Y766; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y767), and an effect command is provided. Perform the setting process (step Y768). Next, the probability state command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y769), the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step Y770), and the small hit of the special figure 2 is in progress, that is, Special Figure 2 It is determined whether or not the player is in a special gaming state to be executed based on the result of the variable display game being a small hit (step Y771).

If the small hit in FIG. 2 is in progress (step Y771; Y), the process proceeds to step Y774. On the other hand, when the small hit in FIG. 2 is not in progress (step Y771; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y772). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y773). As a result, the first game status display unit 5
6 is turned off, and a display instructing left-handed strike is displayed. After that, the special figure 1 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y774), the special figure 1 normal processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y775), and the special figure 1 Ends the process being displayed.

[Processing during display of special figure 2]
46 and 47 show the process during display of the special figure 2 (step Y144) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. The special figure 2 display process is the same process as the special figure 1 display process described above for the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 display process, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the small hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y811), and the small hit flag is flagged. Clear two areas (step Y812).

Next, the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 area in the jackpot flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y813), and the jackpot flag 2 area is cleared (step Y814). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is the big hit information (step Y815), and when the special figure 2 is a big hit (step Y815; Y), the special figure 2 variation display game. The test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on and the special symbol 2 hit signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y816).

Next, the decorative special symbol command corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern is loaded and prepared from the hit symbol command area (step Y817), and the effect command setting process (step Y818) is performed.
I do. After that, the fanfare command is prepared (step Y819), and the effect command setting process (step Y820) is performed.
Next, the signal corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of becoming a big hit in the special figure fluctuation display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y821). In the case of this embodiment
Two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability.

After that, the big hit fanfare time (for example, 100msec) corresponding to the big winning opening opening information
Is set (step Y822), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y823). Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y824), and the game is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y825). Further, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (step Y826) is performed to perform the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing.
Special figure 2 Displaying processing ends.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y815; N), that is, the big hit flag 2
If the information is out of order, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (small hit information) (step Y827). Then, when the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y8).
In 27; Y), it is determined whether it is a high-probability final variation (step Y828), and when it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y828; N), it is determined whether it is a time-reduced final variation (step Y829). Here, when the fall lottery for the running special figure 2 variation display game is won, it is determined that the final variation has a high probability. Further, when the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is the special figure variation display game 100 times (the number of times of support) from the end of the special gaming state, it is determined that the final variation is shortened.

Then, if it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y828; N) and if it is not a time-reduced final variation (step Y829; N), the process proceeds to step Y834. Further, in the case of a high-probability final variation (step Y828; Y) or a time-reduced final variation (step Y829; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y830), and an effect command is provided. Perform the setting process (step Y831). Next, the probability state command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y832), and the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step Y833).
In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is a high probability state, the big winning opening is opened by the occurrence of a small hit, but the player is not aware of the occurrence of the small hit. In order to do so, the screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed.

Next, the command is loaded and prepared from the hit symbol command area (step Y834), and the command is prepared.
The effect command setting process (step Y835) is performed. Further, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y836), an effect command setting process (step Y837) is performed, and a signal related to a right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y838).
). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y839). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned on, and a display instructing right-handed strike is made.
After that, the area of the number of illegal winnings of the lower prize opening is cleared (step Y840), the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the flag area of the illegal monitoring period of the lower winning opening (step Y841), and the special figure 2
Small hit fanfare processing During transition setting processing (step Y857) is performed, and the processing during display of special figure 2 is terminated.

Further, when the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y827; N), it is determined whether it is a high-probability final variation (step Y843), and when it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y84).
In 3; N), it is determined whether or not the time is the final variation (step Y844). Here, when the fall lottery for the running special figure 2 variation display game is won, it is determined that the final variation has a high probability. In addition, the running special figure 2 variable display game has been played 100 times since the end of the special game state (
(Number of times of support) In the case of the special figure fluctuation display game of the eye, it is determined that the time is shortened and the final fluctuation is made.

Then, if it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y843; N) and if it is not a time-reduced final variation (step Y844; N), the process proceeds to step Y850. Further, in the case of a high-probability final variation (step Y843; Y) or a time-reduced final variation (step Y844; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y845), and an effect command is provided. Perform the setting process (step Y846). Next, the probability state command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step Y847), and the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y848). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y849). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned off, and a display instructing left-handed strike is displayed. After that, the special figure 2 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y850), the special figure 2 normal processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y851), and the special figure 2 is Ends the process being displayed.

That is, based on the fact that the variable display game has the first special result, the game control device 100 generates a first special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened with the operation of the conditional device. A second special game generating means for generating a second special gaming state in which the special variable winning device is opened without the operation of the conditional device based on the fact that the variable display game has achieved the second special result. Eggplant.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
48 and 49 show fanfare / interval processing (steps Y112, Y145) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing. In this fanfare / interval processing, first, it is determined whether the remaining ball counter is 0 (step Y941), and if the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step Y941; N), the fanfare / interval processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the remaining ball counter is 0 (step Y941; Y), it is determined whether it is the first round (step Y942).

If it is not the first round (step Y942; N), the process proceeds to step Y950. On the other hand, in the case of the first round (step Y942; Y), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 (step Y943). Here, in the present embodiment, the special gaming state is started by the game ball passing through the normal drawing start gate 34 after the big hit (first special result) is derived in the special figure variation display game. There is.

If the game ball does not pass through the normal drawing start gate 34 (step Y943; N), the fanfare / interval processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the game ball has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 (step Y943; Y), the round number upper limit value table is set (step Y944), and the round number upper limit corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is set. The value (10 in the case of this embodiment) is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value area (step Y945). Further, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y946).

Next, the area of the number of illegal winnings of the upper prize opening is cleared (step Y947), and the flag outside the fraudulent monitoring period is saved in the area of the upper prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y948). After that, the on-output data of the signal during operation of the accessory continuous operation device is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y949), and the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step Y950).
.. Then, the large winning opening opening information and the round command corresponding to the number of rounds are prepared (step Y951), and the effect command setting process (step Y952) is performed.

Next, the initial value of the jackpot processing control pointer corresponding to the jackpot opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y953), the pointer initial value is saved in the jackpot processing control pointer area (step Y954), and the jackpot prize is won. The large winning opening time corresponding to the opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y955). As the initial value of the processing control pointer during the big hit, 0 is set when opening and closing are repeated in one round. In this embodiment, long opening with V corresponds. In addition, when opening once in one round, the jackpot operation end value (
In the case of this embodiment, 2) is set. The initial value may be set to a value other than 0 according to the number of times of opening and closing in one round.

Next, it is determined whether it is a lever solenoid operation round (step Y956). The lever solenoid operation round is a round in which the lever solenoid 38f is operated to operate the lever member, and in the case of the present embodiment, it is only the first specific round. Then, in the case of the lever solenoid operation round (step Y956; Y), the operation data of the lever solenoid is set (step Y957). As a result, data is set in the lever solenoid control pointer area, and the lever solenoid control timer is cleared. On the other hand, when it is not the lever solenoid operation round (step Y956; N),
The stop data of the lever solenoid is set (step Y958).

After that, 4 is set as the processing number (step Y959), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y960). Then, in the case of a big hit in Special Figure 1 (step Y960;
In Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y961), and the large winning opening opening time is saved in the special drawing 1 game processing timer area (step Y962). on the other hand,
If it is not the big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y960; N), that is, if it is the big hit of the special figure 2, the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y963), and the big winning opening opening time is set. Special figure 2 Saving in the game processing timer area (step Y964).

Then, the signal related to the opening start of the upper prize opening is saved in the test signal output data area (
Step Y965). Here, the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1 is set to ON. Next, the first
In order to open the opening / closing member of the special variable winning device 38, the upper winning opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y966), and the number of winning entries to the large winning opening is counted. (Step Y967) to end the fanfare / interval processing.

In the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, in the special gaming state based on the big hit (first special gaming state), only the upper big winning opening (first special variable device 38) is open and small. In the special gaming state based on the hit (second special gaming state), only the lower large winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) is opened, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the opening / closing mode in the first special gaming state may be such that the upper prize opening is opened in the first round and the lower prize opening is opened in the second and subsequent rounds.

[Special figure 1 jackpot end processing]
FIG. 50 shows the special figure 1 jackpot end process (step Y11) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process.
5) was shown. In this special figure 1 big hit end process, first, a subroutine call is made based on the time reduction determination data (step Y1101). If the time reduction determination data has no time reduction in step Y1101, the jackpot end setting process 1 (step Y1102) is performed, and if the time reduction determination data has a time reduction in step Y1101, the jackpot end setting process 2 (step Y1102) is performed. Step Y1103) is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is specific area passage information (step Y1104). In the present embodiment, the specific area passage flag is set when the game ball flows into the specific area (probability variable operation area).
When this specific area passage flag is set, it is determined that there is specific area passage information. If there is no specific area passage information (step Y1104; N), the process proceeds to step Y1106. On the other hand, when there is information passing through a specific area (step Y1104; Y), the jackpot end setting process 3 (step Y1105) is performed. Then, the probability information command is loaded from the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1106), and the game ball to the specific area (probability variation operation area) in the special gaming state based on the normal jackpot (10R normal jackpot in the case of this embodiment). (Step Y1107), it is determined whether or not the inflow of the specific region is irregular.

If the passage is not irregular in a specific region (step Y1107; N), step Y1
Move to 109. On the other hand, when the passage is irregular in a specific region (step Y1107;
In Y), the irregular probability change information is added to the probability information command (step Y1108).
), The effect command setting process (step Y1109) is performed. By the process of step Y1109, the probability information command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. As the probability information command transmitted here, there are a plurality of commands containing the effect mode information in any of "high probability / time saving", "low probability / time saving", and "low probability / no time saving". Yes, in the case of irregular passage in the probability variation operation region, irregular probability variation information is added.

Next, "0" related to the special figure 1 normal processing is set as the processing number (step Y1110), and the processing number is set.
The processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1111). Next, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1112).
Here, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, the signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1113). here,
Condition device operating signal, accessory continuous operating device operating signal, special symbol 1 per signal and special symbol 2
Set the hit signal to OFF.

Next, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1114), and the light is turned off.
Save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the fraud monitoring period flag area of the upper prize opening (step Y1)
115), clear the special figure status area (step Y1116). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed is set. And special figure 2 game wait time value (
For example, 8 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1117), and the special figure 1 big hit end processing is terminated.

By performing this special figure 1 jackpot end processing, it is possible to start the special figure variation display game for both special figure 1 and special figure 2, but in the timer interrupt processing, the special figure 2 game is performed after the special figure 1 game processing. In order to perform the processing, the processing to start the special figure variation display game is performed in the special figure 2 game processing by the timer interrupt that has performed the special figure 1 big hit end processing, and the special figure 2 variation display game is performed rather than the special figure 1 variation display game. Can be started earlier. Therefore, in step Y1117, the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area.
The start process of the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt process, and the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interrupt.
That is, the second variable display game execution control means is the first until the game control device 100 can execute the process related to the start of the first variable display game after the end of the special game state. 2 Variable display A game processing standby means for preventing the processing related to the start of the game from being executed.

[Special figure 2 big hit end processing]
FIG. 51 shows the special figure 2 big hit end process (step Y14) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process.
8) was shown. The special figure 2 big hit end process is the step Y110 in the above-mentioned special figure 1 big hit process.
It is the same process except that 9 is not performed. In this special figure 2 big hit end process, first, a subroutine call is made based on the time reduction determination data (step Y1131). Step Y113
If there is no time reduction in the time reduction determination data in 1, the jackpot end setting process 1 (step Y1)
132) is performed, and if the time reduction determination data has a time reduction in step Y1131, the jackpot end setting process 2 (step Y1133) is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is specific area passage information (step Y1134), and if there is no specific area passage information (step Y1134; N), the process proceeds to step Y1136. On the other hand, when there is information passing through a specific area (step Y1134; Y), the jackpot end setting process 3 (step Y1135) is performed. Then, the probability information command is loaded from the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1136), and the game ball to the specific area (probability variable operation area) in the special gaming state based on the normal jackpot (10R normal jackpot in the case of this embodiment). It is determined whether or not the passage is irregular in the specific region, which is the inflow of the (step Y1137).

If the passage is not irregular in the specific region (step Y1137; N), step Y1
Move to 139. On the other hand, when the passage is irregular in a specific region (step Y1137;
In Y), add irregular probability change information to the probability information command (step Y1138).
), The effect command setting process (step Y1139) is performed. By the process of step Y1139, the probability information command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. As the probability information command transmitted here, there are a plurality of commands containing the effect mode information in any of "high probability / time saving", "low probability / time saving", and "low probability / no time saving". Yes, in the case of irregular passage in the probability variation operation region, irregular probability variation information is added.

Next, "0" related to the special figure 2 normal processing is set as the processing number (step Y1140), and the processing number is set.
The processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1141). Next, the signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1143).
Here, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, the signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1143). here,
Condition device operating signal, accessory continuous operating device operating signal, special symbol 1 per signal and special symbol 2
Set the hit signal to OFF.

Next, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1144), and the light is turned off.
Save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the fraud monitoring period flag area of the upper prize opening (step Y11)
45), the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1146), and the special figure 2 big hit end process is completed. By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed is set.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
FIG. 52A shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (steps Y1102, 1132) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In the jackpot end setting process 1, first, the signal relating to the start without time reduction is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1151). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to OFF. At this point, only the data is set and no output is made.

Next, the signal relating to the start without time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1152). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and the ordinary electric accessory 1 Set the open extension status signal to OFF.
After that, the number without time reduction is saved in the game status display number area (step Y1153), and the number is saved.
Save the normal time reduction flag in the normal game mode flag area (step Y1154).
.. Next, the special figure low probability and no time reduction flag are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1155), and the time reduction fluctuation number area for managing the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the time reduction state is set to 0. Clear (step Y1156).

Next, the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1).
157). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Next, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1158). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned off, and a display instructing left-handed strike is displayed. After that, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1159), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is terminated. By this process, it becomes a normal game state.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 52 (b) shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (steps Y1103, 1133) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In this jackpot end setting process 2, first, the signal related to the start of the time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1).
161). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. The big hit 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

Next, the signal relating to the start with a time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1162). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and the ordinary electric accessory 1 Set the open extension status signal to ON.
After that, the number with the time reduction is saved in the game status display number area (step Y1163), and the number is saved.
Save the flag with the normal time reduction in the normal figure game mode flag area (step Y1164).
.. Next, the special figure low probability and the time saving flag are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1165), and the initial time saving fluctuation number area for managing the number of times of the special figure variation display game that can be executed in the time saving state is initially set. Save the value (step Y1166). In the case of this embodiment, since the number of times of support is 100, 100 is saved as an initial value in step Y1166.

Then, the probability information command (time reduction) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1167), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is terminated. By this processing, it becomes the second specific game state with a low probability of special figure. In the case of this embodiment, the right-handed mode is used during the time saving state.
Since the right-handed mode is set from the big hit, the right-handed setting is not performed in the big hit end setting process 2.

[Big hit end setting process 3]
FIG. 53 shows the jackpot end setting process 3 (steps Y1105 and Y1135) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In this jackpot end setting process 3, first, the signal relating to the start of the special figure time reduction is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1).
171). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. The big hit 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

Next, save the signal related to the start with high probability & time saving in the test signal output data area (
Step Y1172). Here, the special symbol 1 high-probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high-probability state signal, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal are set to ON. After that, the number with the time reduction is saved in the game status display number area (step Y1173).
), Save the special figure high probability and time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1174).

Next, the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1).
175). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Next, the game status display number 2
The number in the right-handed state is saved in the area (step Y1176). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned on, and a display instructing right-handed strike is made. After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1177), and the jackpot end setting process 3 is terminated. This process results in a high probability state. That is, by executing the big hit end setting process 3 after the big hit end setting process 1, the first specific game state is set.
By executing the jackpot end setting process 3 after the jackpot end setting process 2, the second with a high probability of special figure
It becomes a specific game state.
By the above processing, it becomes possible to set a specific gaming state which is a high probability state after the end of the first special gaming state. That is, the game control device 100 has a specific game state (first specific game state ST2, special figure high probability second specific game state ST3) in which the probability that the result of the special variation display game becomes a special result is higher than the normal state. Is a means for generating a specific game state that can generate.

[Small hit fanfare processing]
FIG. 54 shows the small hit fanfare middle process (step Y149) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. In this small hit fanfare middle process, first, a small hit opening command for opening the lower prize opening is prepared (step Y1201), and an effect command setting process (step Y1202) is performed. Next, 8 related to the small hit medium processing is set as the processing number (step Y1203), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1204).
).

Next, the small hit opening time (for example, 1600 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1205), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit operation (special electric accessory 2 operating signal is turned ON) is a test signal. Save to the output data area (step Y1206). and,
Save the lower prize opening on-data in the grand prize opening solenoid output data area (step Y12)
07), the large winning opening count area for counting the number of winnings to the large winning opening is cleared (step Y1208), and the processing during the small hit fanfare is completed.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
FIG. 55 shows the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y15) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process.
2) was shown. In this special figure 2 small hit end process, first, 0 related to the special figure 2 normal process is set as the process number (step Y1331), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1332).

Next, the signal regarding the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y).
1333). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1334), the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1335), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1335). Step Y1336). By clearing the special figure status area
The special figure status 0 indicates that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure has a low probability and no time reduction (during a normal game state) (step Y133).
7) In the case of low probability of special figure & no time reduction (step Y1337; N), step Y
Move to 1340. In addition, when the special figure has a low probability and there is no time reduction (step Y1337;
In Y), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y).
1338). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1339), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted (step Y1340).

Then, when the special figure 1 variable display game is not interrupted (step Y1340; N),
The special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1343), and the special figure 2 small hit end process is terminated. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended (step Y1340; Y).
In), a decorative special figure 1 restart command is prepared (step Y1341), and an effect command setting process (step Y1342) is performed. After that, clear the special figure 1 game interruption flag area (
Step Y1343), special figure 2 small hit end processing is completed. As a result, the interrupted special figure 2 variable display game is restarted with the end of the special gaming state based on the small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game.

That is, the game control device 100 is the first variable display game execution control means (game control device 1).
When the execution control of one of the variable display game execution control means is performed by one of the variable display game execution control means (00) and the second variable display game execution control means (game control device 100).
When the other variable display game whose execution is controlled by the other variable display game execution control means has a special result, one variable display game is interrupted and the special gaming state based on the other variable display game is changed. It is a restart control means that can execute restart control to restart one of the variable display games that was interrupted after the game was finished.

[Game machine status command transmission processing]
FIG. 56 shows the gaming machine state command transmission processing (step X121) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing. In this gaming machine status command transmission process, first, if the gaming machine status command transmission timer that manages the interval for periodically transmitting the gaming machine status command is not 0, the game machine status command transmission timer is updated by -1 (step X601), and the gaming machine status command transmission is performed. It is determined whether the timer has timed up (step X602).

When the game machine status command transmission timer has not timed up (step X602; N)
) Ends the game machine status command transmission process. When the time-up of the gaming machine status command transmission timer is up (step X602; Y), the timer initial value is saved in the gaming machine status command transmission timer area (step X603). Here, 16 ms is set as the initial value. This time is the same as the error monitoring cycle in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step X109), which is one of the error monitoring processes.
Of course, other time values may be used.

Next, clear data is set as the gaming machine status command 1 (ACTION) (step X604), values indicating the presence or absence of each error are combined (steps X605 to X611), and the gaming machine status command 1 (ACTION) is generated. (See FIG. 57 (a)). The status flag of each error is set in the process of monitoring the corresponding error. Then, the gaming machine status command 1 (MODE) is prepared (step X612), and the effect command setting process for setting the transmission of the gaming machine status command 1 is performed (step X613).

Next, clear data is set as the gaming machine status command 2 (ACTION) (step X614), values indicating the presence or absence of each error are combined (steps X615 to X621), and the gaming machine status command 2 (ACTION) is generated. (See FIG. 57 (b)). The status flag of each error is set in the process of monitoring the corresponding error. Then, the gaming machine status command 2 (MODE) is prepared (step X622), the effect command setting process for setting the transmission of the gaming machine status command 2 is performed (step X623), and the gaming machine status command transmission process is terminated.

FIG. 57 shows the structure of the gaming machine state command. Information indicating the presence or absence of an error is set in each bit. Also, the most significant bit is always set to 0 to distinguish it from the MODE of the command. Information regarding the presence or absence of an abnormality in the gaming machine is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by the gaming machine state commands 1 and 2. Further, the gaming machine status commands 1 and 2 are periodically transmitted (here, every 16 ms).

As will be described later, in the effect control device 300, when a new command is received while the command storage area is full, the oldest command is overwritten, but the gaming machine state commands 1 and 2 are periodically executed. Even if the gaming machine status commands 1 and 2 are destroyed by overwriting, the gaming machine status can be transmitted by the new gaming machine status commands 1 and 2, and the notification of abnormality etc. can be surely transmitted. It can be carried out.

Note that the gaming machine status commands 1 and 2 may be periodically transmitted only when an abnormality has occurred. Further, when an abnormality has occurred, only the command for notifying the occurrence of the abnormality among the gaming machine status commands 1 and 2 may be periodically transmitted, or both the gaming machine status commands 1 and 2 may be transmitted. You may also send it regularly.
Further, when the abnormality is resolved in this case, the gaming machine status commands 1 and 2 indicating that there is no abnormality may be periodically transmitted over a certain period of time. In this case as well, only the command that notified the abnormality that occurred among the game machine status commands 1 and 2 may be transmitted periodically for a certain period, or both the game machine status commands 1 and 2 may be transmitted. It may be sent periodically over a certain period of time.

It is also possible to select whether or not to periodically transmit one or both of the gaming machine status commands 1 and 2 according to the presence / absence of an abnormality, the type of the abnormality occurring, the gaming status, and the like. good. Further, the transmission cycle of the gaming machine state commands 1 and 2 may be selected according to the presence / absence of an abnormality, the type of the abnormality occurring, the gaming state, and the like.

Here, an example of the data structure of ROM 111B is shown in FIG. 58.
The ROM 111B provided in the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 is shown in FIG. 58 (
As shown in a), the program / data area where the program and fixed data are stored, the ROM comment area where arbitrary data such as the title and version of the program can be set, and the start address and timer allocation of the subroutine of the CALLV instruction. It has a vector table area in which a table for setting the start address of the embedded processing is stored, and an HW (hardware) parameter area in which parameters for setting the internal functions of the gaming microcomputer 111 in terms of hardware are stored. ing.

In the program / data area, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), a program area 111Ba in which various programs are stored, a first unused area 111Bb, and a data area 111Bc in which various fixed data are stored are stored in this order from the beginning. And a second unused area 111Bd are provided. Then, when the CPU 111A accesses the second unused area 111Bd, an illegal access reset is configured to occur.

As shown in FIG. 58B, the data area 111Bc stores the area A1 for the upper limit judgment value table in which the upper limit judgment value table used for the jackpot judgment is stored, and the performance display in which the data related to the performance display is stored. Areas for various data such as the area A3 for various data are provided. Further, an unused area A2 for which access is prohibited is provided between the area A1 for the upper limit determination value table and the area A3 for displaying the performance in the data area 111Bc. And C
When the PU111A accesses the unused area A2, an illegal access reset is configured to occur.

The CPU 111A sets the upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value in step X585 of the look-ahead jackpot determination process (FIG. 19) and step Y315 of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 28). At that time, the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is used as a pointer, and R
The upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is acquired from OM111B and set.
Further, the CPU 111A sets an upper limit determination value in high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value in step X584 of the look-ahead jackpot determination process (FIG. 19) and step Y314 of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 28). At that time, the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is used as a pointer, and the upper limit determination value in the high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is acquired and set from the ROM 111B.

In the look-ahead jackpot determination process and the jackpot determination process, the process of determining whether the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is within the normal range (range of 0 to 5 in this embodiment) is not performed. for that reason,
Even when the value in the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is out of the normal range, the data is acquired from the ROM 111B using the value (abnormal value) as a pointer. Therefore, for example, FIG.
As shown in 9, when the unused area A2 is not arranged immediately after the area A1 for the upper limit judgment value table, that is, the area A1 for the upper limit judgment value table and the area A3 for displaying the performance are adjacent to each other. If this is the case, an accurate jackpot determination cannot be made, and there may be inconveniences such as a markedly easy jackpot or a significantly difficult jackpot.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59, when the area A1 for the upper limit judgment value table and the area A3 for performance display are adjacent to each other, and the upper limit judgment value in the low probability is acquired from the ROM 111B. In addition, when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "5" (within the normal range), the upper limit determination corresponding to "setting 6" in the low probability is made by using the value as a pointer. You can get the value, that is, the exact data. On the other hand, the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "7".
When it is (outside the normal range), by using the value as a pointer, the data stored in the performance display area A3, that is, erroneous data is acquired. The same applies to the case of acquiring the upper limit determination value in high probability from ROM 111B.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), the area A for the upper limit determination value table
Immediately after 1, the unused area A2 was placed. As a result, when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is out of the normal range, if an attempt is made to acquire the upper limit determination value from the ROM 111B using the value as a pointer, the unused area (access prohibited area) A2 is used. Since it will be accessed, an illegal access reset will occur. As a result, it is possible to initialize the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM and to notify the abnormality.

Specifically, when an illegal access reset occurs, the program is restarted and the main processing (FIGS. 10 and 11) is started. At that time, since the processing when a power failure occurs (steps X55 to X61) is not executed before the restart, the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is not the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 in the main processing after the restart. Is determined (step X16; N). At that time, since the setting change operation (operation of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112) is not performed at the time of restart, in the main process after the restart, the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are used. It is determined that both are in the off state (step X21; N). Therefore, since the processing of steps X25 and X26 is executed, the setting change operation is requested, that is, the abnormality is notified. Then, due to this request (notification), the power of the gaming machine is turned on again while executing the setting change operation, so that the value in the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is initialized ( Step X28).

As shown in FIG. 58 (c), the area A1 for the upper limit determination value table is the data area 1.
It may be placed at the end of 11Bc. In this case, even if the unused area A2 is not placed immediately after the area A1 for the upper limit judgment value table, an illegal access reset occurs when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is out of the normal range. do. That is, when the area A1 for the upper limit determination value table is arranged at the end of the data area 111Bc, when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is out of the normal range, the value is used as a pointer and the upper limit is set from the ROM 111B. When trying to acquire the determination value, the second unused area (access prohibited area) 111Bd is accessed, so that an illegal access reset occurs.

From the above, the game machine 10 of the present embodiment has a control means (game control device 100 (CPU111A)) for controlling the game and a storage means (game) in which information necessary for controlling the game by the control means is stored. The storage area includes the control device 100 (ROM111B)) and is included in the area for the probability value table (area A1 for the upper limit determination value table) among the plurality of storage areas included in the storage means. The probability value assigned to the probability setting value corresponding to is stored, and the control means stores the probability setting value stored in the storage means (the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM) among the plurality of storage areas. Information (data) is acquired from the corresponding storage area, a game lottery (big hit determination) is performed using the information, and in the storage means, the information is not continuously stored in the area for the probability value table. Used area (unused area A2, second unused area 11)
1Bd) is configured to be arranged (see FIGS. 58 (b) and 58 (c)).
With this configuration, if the probability setting value (value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM) stored in the storage means is out of the normal range, the unused area (unused area A2, The second unused area 111Bd) will be accessed. That is, since the lottery itself is not executed when an accurate lottery result cannot be obtained, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the lottery is remarkably easy to win or the lottery is remarkably difficult to win.

Next, the control by the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs the main process shown in FIG. 60, the timer interrupt process (not shown), and the command reception interrupt process shown in FIG. 61.

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 60, in the main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of this program, interrupts are first disabled (step C1), and the initial setting of the CPU is performed (step C2). Next, the initial setting of VDP312 is performed (step C3), and interrupts are permitted (step C4). Then, the generation of display data is permitted (step C).
5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at the time of power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

After performing the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, the effect button input process (step C9) for creating input information from the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. The input from the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 is read in the timer interrupt process, and in this effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, the effect content is changed.

Then, the setting of the changeable range such as the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal, and the LED by the player
The hall / player setting mode process for accepting operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the liquid crystal display and the liquid crystal display is performed (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) for updating a random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.

Next, a reception command check process (step C12) that analyzes commands from the game control device 100 and responds to them is performed, and an effect display editing process (step C13) that edits settings and drawing commands for controlling the progress of the effect. ) To set the end of preparation for the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and finally the drawing data is set in the frame buffer. 1/3
If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 0 seconds (about 33.3 msec) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In this embodiment, a V blank interrupt (1/6) is created in order to create a system cycle (1 frame 1/30 second).
When (0 seconds) is entered twice, it is determined that the frame switching timing is reached. The frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated (frames) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. (Switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, a sound control process (step C17) that controls the output of audio from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), and a decoration control process that controls LEDs such as the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 (step). C18), a panel that performs a movable body control process (step C19) that controls the motor, solenoid, and reel 6 of the panel effect device 44, and controls the effect by the notification unit 72, the point notification unit 73, the cumulative value notification unit 74, and the like. The effect setting process (step C20) is performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing the WDT (step C8).

[Command reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 61 shows a command reception interrupt process for storing a command transmitted from the game control device 100 in a command buffer area provided in the RAM 322. Game control device 1
The commands from 00 are MODE indicating the type of command and ACTI indicating the contents of the command.
It is composed of ON and these combinations make one command.

In the command reception interrupt processing, first, the reception monitoring timer is stopped (step C101), and then
The command received from the game control device 100 is read from the receive buffer of the command I / F331 to the register of the CPU 311 (step C102), and it is determined whether the received command is within the MODE range (step C103). ). If the received command is in the MOD range (step C103; Y), the command is received MOD.
Save as E in the receive command area provided in RAM 322 (step C104).
.. The receive command area is an area provided in the RAM 322 and is a dedicated area for temporarily storing received commands. Next, as the MODE reception flag, OK indicating that MODE is being received is set (step C105), the reception monitoring timer is set to 0 and the start (step C106), and the command reception interrupt processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the received command is not in the MODE range (step C103; N), M.
It is determined whether the OD reception flag is OK (step C107). If the MODE reception flag is not OK (step C107; N), NG indicating that MODE is not received is set as the MODE reception flag (step C120), and the command reception interrupt processing is terminated. In this case, the command is not received normally, and the command in the received command area is discarded.

If the MODE reception flag is OK (step C107; Y), it is determined whether the reception monitoring timer has timed out (step C108). If the reception monitoring timer has timed out (step C108; Y), the MODE reception flag is set to MODE.
Is set to NG indicating that the command reception interrupt processing is not received (step C120), and the command reception interrupt processing is terminated. In this case, the command is not received normally, and the command in the received command area is discarded.

If the reception monitoring timer has not timed out (step C108; N), the command is saved as a reception command in the reception command area (step C109), and MODE
NG is set as the reception flag (step C110). Next, receive MODE and receive A
CTION is loaded from the received command area and prepared (step C111), and a received command range check process for checking whether the received command is within a valid range as a command is performed (step C112).

The effect control device 300 checks the validity after storing the received command in the received command area provided in the RAM 322. Since there are many types of commands transmitted to the effect control device 300 and the range of commands is wide, the validity check is complicated, and the validity is renewed after the received commands are stored in the received command area provided in the RAM 322 from the register. I try to check it. Therefore, although it takes a long time for processing, accuracy can be ensured.

When the range check by the received command range check process is not OK (step C11)
3; N), that is, if it is out of the valid range as a command, the command reception interrupt processing is terminated. In this case, the command is not received normally, and the command in the received command area is discarded. Further, when the range check by the received command range check process is OK (step C113; Y), that is, when the range is valid as a command, it corresponds to the command write index indicating the area for storing the command received this time. The address of the command buffer area to be used is calculated (step C114), and the received MODE and the received ACTION are saved in the calculated command buffer area (step C115). The command buffer area is an area in the RAM 322 for storing commands.

Next, the command write index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C116).
, The command reception counter indicating the number of commands stored in the command buffer area is 3.
It is determined whether it is 2 or more (step C117). 32 areas for storing commands are prepared in the command buffer area, and when the command reception counter is 32 or more, there is no free space in the command buffer area.

If the command reception counter is not 32 or more (step C117; N), the command reception counter is updated by +1 (step C118), and the command reception interrupt processing is terminated.
In this case, there is space in the command buffer area, and the command is stored in the free area.

On the other hand, when the command reception counter is 32 or more (step C117; Y), the command read index indicating the area for reading the command is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C119), and the command reception interrupt processing is performed. To finish. In this case, there is no space in the command buffer area, and the new command is overwritten in the area where the oldest command is stored. The command is read so that the oldest command after the overwritten command becomes the next command to be read. Update the index.

[Receive command check process]
FIG. 62 shows the received command check process in the above-mentioned main process. In this received command check process, first, the value of the command reception counter that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the number of command receptions (
Step C201), it is determined whether or not the number of commands received is not 0 (step C202).
.. Then, when it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process is terminated. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of command receptions (step C203).

Then, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204).
), The command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and it is determined whether or not the copy of the command corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C206).
As described above, in the present embodiment, the command is not analyzed directly in the received command buffer.
The contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command analysis work is performed in the command area. As a result, the command (data) is prepared in case the command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command.
Can be moved to make room. In addition, command analysis can be performed collectively in units of one round of main processing.

If it is determined in step C206 that the copy of the command for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to the process of step C204. Further, when it is determined that the copy of the command corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C206; Y),
The contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and the received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of the command corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210). Then, when it is determined that the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is not completed (step C210; N),
The process returns to step C207. Further, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is terminated. In this way, in the received command check process, the commands received in one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 63 shows the received command analysis process in the above-mentioned received command check process. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte is ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether the MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). MODE and A
When CT is determined to be in the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y)
To determine if the ACT for MODE is the correct combination (step C23).
4).

Further, when it is determined in step C232 and C233 that the MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is not the correct combination (step). C2
34; N) ends the received command analysis process.

When it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is the correct combination (
In step C234; Y), MODE determines whether or not it is within the range of the variable command (step C235). The variable command is a command that commands the variable pattern of the special figure. Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235).
In Y), a variable command process (step C236) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, when it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not within the range of the variable command (
In step C235; N), MODE determines whether or not it is within the range of the jackpot command (step C237). The jackpot command is a command for commanding an operation related to a big hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) or a command for an operation related to a small hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen, an end screen, etc.). And MO
When it is determined that the DE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C237; Y), the jackpot command process (step C238) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not in the range of the jackpot command (step C237; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the symbol command (step C239). The symbol-based command is a command for instructing information about the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what the stop symbol of the special symbol should be). Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the symbol-based command (step C239; Y), the symbol-based command processing (step C239; Y) is performed.
Step C240) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, when it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not within the range of the symbol-based command (
In step C239; N), MODE determines whether or not it is within the range of one-shot commands such as a hold count command and an error command (step C241). A single-shot command is a command that is established independently, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. This one-shot command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold count command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / invalid command, a model specification command, and the like. Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of a single-shot command (step C24).
In 1; Y), a single-shot command process (step C242) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, when it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of the one-shot command (
In step C241; N), MODE determines whether or not it is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243). Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the look-ahead symbol-based command (step C243; Y), the look-ahead symbol-based command processing (step C2) is performed.
44) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, when it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not in the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is in the range of the look-ahead variable system command (step C245). When the MODE determines that the command is within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; Y), the look-ahead variable command process (step C246) is performed to end the received command analysis process. Also, in step C245,
When it is determined that the MODE is not within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; N).
Ends the received command analysis process.

The look-ahead variable command and the look-ahead symbol command are commands that include information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. The look-ahead effect (also called look-ahead notice or look-ahead notice effect) is whether or not the special figure change display game corresponding to the start memory (holding) in which the special figure change display game has not been executed becomes a big hit when the special figure change display game is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance of (or what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) with a predetermined reliability, the decorative special figure start memory display or the like to be displayed on the display device 41 may be performed in a mode different from the usual mode, or the display device 41 may be displayed. It is a production such as performing a production display. The look-ahead command (look-ahead variable command and look-ahead symbol command) is a command that informs in advance the fluctuation pattern and the stop symbol corresponding to the start memory that is the target of the look-ahead effect, and is from the game control device 100 at the time of starting winning. It is transmitted to the effect control device 300. It should be noted that normal variable commands and symbol commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

[Read-ahead design command processing]
FIG. 64 shows a look-ahead symbol-based command process (step C244) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process. In this look-ahead symbol-based command processing, first, it is determined whether the latest hold information is the special figure 1 hold (step C301). When the latest hold information is the special figure 1 hold (step C301; Y), that is, when the received look-ahead symbol system command is related to the special figure 1 hold, the command corresponds to the special figure 1 hold number. FIG. 1 Saves in the look-ahead symbol command area (step C302), sets the look-ahead fluctuation command reception waiting flag (step C304), and ends the look-ahead symbol command processing.

Further, when the latest hold information is not the special figure 1 hold (step C301; N), that is,
If the received look-ahead symbol command is related to the special figure 2 hold, save the command in the special figure 2 look-ahead symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number (step C303), and set the look-ahead fluctuation command reception wait flag. Set (step C304) to end the look-ahead symbol command processing. The read-ahead variation command reception waiting flag is set in step C304 because the look-ahead symbol command and the look-ahead variation command (look-ahead variation pattern command) are set (paired).

[Read-ahead variable command processing]
FIG. 65 shows the look-ahead variable command process (step C246) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process. In this look-ahead variation command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead variation command is waiting to be received (step C311). Here, when there is a look-ahead fluctuation command reception waiting flag set in the above-mentioned look-ahead symbol system command processing, it is determined that the command is waiting for reception. When not waiting for the look-ahead fluctuation command reception (step C311)
; N) ends the look-ahead variable command processing. On the other hand, when waiting for the look-ahead fluctuation command reception (step C311; Y), the look-ahead fluctuation command reception wait flag is cleared (step C312).

After that, in the processes of steps C313 to C316, a look-ahead variation command (look-ahead variation pattern command) received from the game control device 100 is converted so as to be convenient for processing by the effect control device 300. First, a process (step C313) for setting a look-ahead fluctuation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of holds of the latest hold information symbol is performed, and the information of the special figure type of the start memory corresponding to the look-ahead fluctuation system command received this time and the corresponding information. A MODE conversion table for converting MODE is set according to the current number of reservations of the special figure type.

Next, with reference to the set MODE conversion table, the sub-read-ahead variation command MODE corresponding to the look-ahead variation command MODE is acquired (step C314). Moreover,
The look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is set (step C315), and the sub-pre-reading conversion command ACT corresponding to the look-ahead variation command ACT is acquired (step C316).

The MODE contains information on the first half fluctuations, but since the content and time of the first half fluctuations set based on this MODE change depending on the number of holdings at the time of judgment, the judgment at the time of pre-judgment and the start of the special figure fluctuation display game. The judgment result may differ depending on the judgment of the time. Therefore, in order to be able to easily and surely process the look-ahead notice effect without being affected by the number of holds at the time of determination, the MODE is converted in a conversion mode according to the current number of holds, and at the time of judgment. It is possible to handle in common regardless of the number of pending items. For example, a non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation with a short first half fluctuation time depending on the hold situation, or a non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation with a long first half fluctuation time regardless of the hold status. It is converted into a MODE classified by the matters to be considered in the setting of the look-ahead notice effect so that the process of the look-ahead notice effect can be easily and surely performed.

In addition, the ACT contains information on the latter half fluctuation such as the presence / absence of reach and the type of reach.
The content of the latter half fluctuation set based on this ACT does not change depending on the number of holdings at the time of determination. However, even in normal reach, for example, the final stop symbol is set to stop one frame before the reach symbol, to stop one frame ahead, and to hit.
There are various aspects of the same type of reach, and since the ACT corresponding to each of these is set, the range of values is wide. Therefore, by converting the ACTs corresponding to the reach of the same system to the same ACT, the number is reduced, and the processing load such as the check in the processing of the look-ahead notice effect is reduced.

Next, it is determined whether the converted MODE and ACT are both other than 0 (step C31).
7). When both MODE and ACT after conversion are not other than 0 (step C317; N),
Since the command value is abnormal, the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated. On the other hand, MO after conversion
When both DE and ACT are other than 0 (step C317; Y), the converted command is saved in the latest hold information and the look-ahead variable command area corresponding to the number of holds (step C318).
), A look-ahead command consistency check process (step C319) for determining whether the combination of MODE and ACT (command combination) is normal is performed.

If the command combination is not normal as a result of the look-ahead command consistency check process (step C319) (step C320; N), the look-ahead variable command process is terminated. on the other hand,
When the command combination is normal (step C320; Y), the look-ahead lottery process (step C321) for drawing the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is performed, and it is determined whether the look-ahead notice effect is generated (step C322).

Then, when the look-ahead notice effect is not generated (step C322; N), the look-ahead variable command process is terminated. On the other hand, when a look-ahead notice effect is generated (step C322; Y
) Determines whether the pre-reading notice effect that occurs (that is, the pre-reading notice effect selected in the pre-reading lottery process (step C321)) is an effect that starts immediately (step C3).
23). The effect that starts immediately is, for example, a pending change notice that changes the display mode of the decorative special figure start storage display displayed on the display device 41 from the present time. In addition, the effect that does not start immediately is a look-ahead notice effect performed during the execution of the special figure change display game, and is an effect that continuously generates a specific effect or reach state over a plurality of special figure change display games, or changes. It is a production that gives a notice by a character appearing during the display, a hold change notice that changes the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display at a timing later than the present time, and the like. As for the timing to start the execution of such an effect that does not start immediately, if the special figure variation display game is being executed, the special figure variation display game ends, and the execution of the next special figure variation display game starts. The timing of the game is applicable.

If the effect is not to start immediately (step C323; N), the look-ahead variable command process ends. In this case, the notice is set at the start of the special figure variation display game for executing the look-ahead notice effect. On the other hand, in the case of the effect to be started immediately (step C323; Y), the display corresponding to the selected look-ahead notice effect is set (step C324), and the look-ahead variable command process is terminated.

[Variable command processing]
FIG. 66 shows variable command processing (step C2) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing.
36) was shown. In this variable command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure type is undetermined (step C361). The special figure type is information indicating whether the special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2, and is information set in step C251 of the above-mentioned symbol system command processing.

When this special figure type is undetermined (step C361; Y), the variable command processing is terminated. If the special figure type is not undetermined (step C361; N), that is, if the special figure type is set, the combination of the variable command and the symbol command is checked (step C361; N).
Step C362), it is determined whether the variable command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C).
363).

If the variable command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C363; Y), the variable command process is terminated. If the variable command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C3).
63; N) determines the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C364). The symbol type means a category of symbols, and the symbol types include, for example, a missed symbol, a 10R jackpot symbol, a 4R jackpot symbol, and a small hit symbol. The case where the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent is when the variation command (variation pattern command) that is out of alignment is received, but the symbol command of the 10R jackpot symbol is received. It means that the combination is inconsistent (combination of variable command and symbol type). Also, if one of the commands is discarded or damaged, it will be inconsistent, and in this case as well, processing by the variable command and the symbol command will not be performed.

In the process of determining the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C364), the variation pattern type, which is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure, is determined according to the received command. Then, the variation effect setting process for setting the information for performing the effect according to the variation command is performed (step C365).

Next, the special figure change is set as the P machine state (pachinko machine state) (step C366).
). Here, "during special map change" means that the special figure is changing (not during a customer waiting demonstration, a big hit, or a fanfare). Further, if the number of pre-reading effects (number of times of pre-reading execution) is not zero, the number of pre-reading effects is updated by -1 (process of reducing the number of pre-reading effects by 1) (step C367), and the variable command processing is terminated.

Here, the look-ahead symbol command and the look-ahead fluctuation command (look-ahead fluctuation pattern command) form combination information in which a plurality of pieces of information are combined and used. In the above-mentioned look-ahead variation command processing, if one of the look-ahead symbol command and the look-ahead variation command that form the combination information is not normal information such as when it is discarded or damaged, the combination is abnormal. If there is, the look-ahead effect executed based on the combination information is not performed (step C320).

In addition, the variable command and the symbol command also form combination information that uses a combination of a plurality of pieces of information. In the above-mentioned variable command processing, if one of the variable command and the symbol command that form the combination information is not normal information such as when it is discarded or damaged, the combination is regarded as inconsistent. The decorative special figure variation display game executed based on the information is not played (step C363).

When one of the combination information is discarded or damaged, it is conceivable that the command buffer area is full and overwritten by a new command. In particular, since the gaming machine state commands 1 and 2 are periodically transmitted, if the command processing is delayed due to some problem, the command buffer area may become full and discard due to overwriting may occur. Of course, it is also possible that the received command is discarded or damaged due to a problem other than the command buffer area being full. For example, it is possible that the command cannot be received normally due to a transmission / reception problem. Then, by not performing the corresponding processing when one of the combination information is discarded or damaged, inconvenience due to the existence of the inconsistent command can be prevented.

If one of the combination information is destroyed or damaged, all the commands included in the combination information may also be destroyed. Further, if one of the combination information is found to be damaged, all the commands included in the combination information may be discarded. By doing so, it is possible to prevent inconvenience due to the existence of inconsistent commands, and it is also possible to secure a free area in the command buffer area.

Further, in the effect control device 300, since the new command is overwritten when the command buffer area is full, some commands of the combination information are discarded when a part of the combination information exists as the oldest command. Will be done. In the case where the new command is discarded when the command buffer area is full as in the payout control device 200 described later, a part of the combination information is obtained because the new command is a part of the combination information. The command is discarded. In accordance with such destruction, all of the combination information may be destroyed. As a result, it is possible to secure a free area in the command buffer area when the command before starting the processing for the command is received.

Further, the number of information forming the combination information may be three or more, and in this case as well, at least one.
If one piece of information is destroyed or damaged, processing based on the combination information shall not be performed.

From the above, the game control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game in the game machine capable of executing the game based on the satisfaction of the predetermined conditions and paying out the game medium based on the satisfaction of the predetermined payout conditions. ), And a slave control means (effect control device 300) that controls based on the information (command) transmitted from the game control means, and the slave control means includes a plurality of areas for sequentially storing the received information. An information storage means (RAM322) having an information storage area (command buffer area) is provided, and when new information is received with no space in the information storage area due to unprocessed information, the oldest information is stored. It is configured to discard the information in the area and store new information in the area, and the information includes combination information that uses a combination of multiple pieces of information, and is part of the information contained in the combination information. If the information in is destroyed, it means that the processing executed based on the combination information is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the process from proceeding in an incomplete state and causing further problems.

Further, the slave control means is an effect control means (effect control device 300) that controls the effect based on the effect information forming the information transmitted from the game control means, and the game control means executes the game as combination information. When the variation information (variation command) regarding the mode and the symbol information (symbol command) regarding the result of the game are transmitted to the effect control means, and the effect control means discards one of the variation information and the symbol information, the effect control means discards the variation information and the symbol information. It means that the production related to the game corresponding to the discarded information is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the decoration special figure variation display game from being executed in an incomplete state and causing problems such as an effect that contradicts the result.

Further, the slave control means is an effect control means that controls the effect based on the effect information forming the information transmitted from the game control means, and the game control means starts the execution right of the game when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Starting storage means (game control device 100) that can store up to a predetermined upper limit as storage.
And, prior to the start of the game based on the start memory, a pre-determination means (game control device 100) for determining the execution mode and the result of the game based on the start memory is provided, and the pre-determination means is used as combination information. Based on the determined determination result, the look-ahead fluctuation information (look-ahead fluctuation command (look-ahead fluctuation pattern command)) regarding the execution mode of the game and the look-ahead symbol information (look-ahead symbol command) regarding the result of the game are transmitted to the effect control means. , The effect control means can execute the look-ahead effect of suggesting or notifying the determination result by the pre-judgment means based on the look-ahead variation information and the look-ahead symbol information, and discards one of the look-ahead variation information and the look-ahead symbol information. In that case, it means that the look-ahead effect corresponding to the discarded information is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pre-reading effect from being executed in an incomplete state and causing a problem such as an effect that contradicts the result.

Further, when the slave control means discards a part of the combination information, the slave control means may also discard other information in the combination information. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the process from proceeding in an incomplete state and causing further problems.

Next, the control executed by the payout microcomputer 211 of the payout control device 200 will be described. In the payout microcomputer 211, the main process shown in FIG. 67 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 68 are performed.

[Main processing]
The main process starts when the power is turned on. In this main process, first
Interrupt vector setting process (step A2) that sets the vector address of the jump destination to be executed when an interrupt occurs after performing interrupt prohibition processing (step A1), interrupt mode setting process that sets the interrupt processing mode (step A2) Step A3) is performed.

Next, access permission is given to the read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM and EEPROM (step A4), and all output ports are set to off (no output) (step A5). As a result, the firing permission signal 2 output from the payout control device 200 is also set to off (prohibited state). After that, the stack pointer setting process (step A6) for setting the stack pointer, which is the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs, is performed, and the serial port for communicating with the game control device 100 is set. (Step A7).

Then, all the work areas before the access prohibited area are cleared (step A8), all the stack areas after the access prohibited area are cleared (step A9), and the initial values are saved in the area to be initialized (step A10). ). Next, the CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates the timer interrupt signal in the payout microcomputer (clock generator) is activated (step A11). The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the payout microcomputer. The clock generator has a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit and a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) with respect to the CPU of the payout microcomputer based on the divided signal. It is equipped with a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal of.

After that, the interruption is permitted (step A12), and the firing control determination process for determining whether the game ball can be launched is performed (step A13). In this firing control determination process, it is determined whether the card unit is correctly connected, and if it is correctly connected, the firing permission signal 2 is set to on (permitted state), and if it is not correctly connected, the firing permission signal 2 is set. Off (prohibited state)
Set to.

After that, it is determined whether or not the ball lending control mode for ejecting the game ball is in progress based on the ball lending request from the card unit (step A14). In the ball lending control mode, the ball lending control flag is set, and whether or not the ball lending control mode is in is determined by the presence or absence of the ball lending control flag.

In this ball lending mode (step A14; Y), the ball lending control process (step A15) for performing integrated control regarding ball lending is performed, the payout control process (step A18) is performed, and the error notification editing process (step). Perform A21). This ball lending control process (step A15)
) And the payout control process (step A18), a predetermined number of game balls are ejected based on the ball lending request transmitted from the card unit when the player performs the ball lending operation.

On the other hand, when the ball lending control mode is not in progress (step A14; N), the prize ball control for discharging the game ball based on the payout command (prize ball command) transmitted from the game control device 100 due to the occurrence of a prize in the prize opening. It is determined whether the mode is in (step A16). The prize ball control mode is a state in which the prize ball control flag is set, and whether or not the prize ball control mode is in is determined by the presence or absence of the prize ball control flag.

In this prize ball control mode (step A16; Y), the prize ball control process (step A17) for performing integrated control regarding the prize ball is performed, the payout control process (step A18) is performed, and the error notification editing process is performed. (Step A21) is performed. This prize ball control process (step A17)
In the payout control process (step A18), a predetermined number of game balls are ejected based on the payout command transmitted from the game control device 100 due to the occurrence of a prize in the winning opening.

In the payout control process (step A18), sequence control necessary for performing a common game ball payout operation in payout of prize balls and payout of rental balls is performed. When the payout of the prize ball or the prize ball is completed in this payout control process, the ball lending control flag and the prize ball control flag are cleared, and the ball lending control mode and the prize ball control mode are terminated. There is.

Further, when the prize ball control mode is not set (step A16; N), the payout excess error monitoring process (step A19) for monitoring the occurrence or cancellation of the error in which the game ball is excessively paid out is performed. The release of the overpayment error is performed based on the operation of the error release switch provided in the payout control device 200.

Then, the payout device control start determination process (step A20) for setting the start of the ball lending control mode and the prize ball control mode is performed, and the error notification editing process (step A21) is performed. In the error notification editing process (step A21), the status of various errors is determined, and the payout control device 20
Processing such as editing the display data of the error status display device provided in 0, editing the information transmitted to the game control device 100, and editing the output data of the test firing test signal is performed. After that, the payout busy signal editing process (step A) in which the condition regarding the output of the payout busy signal indicating to the game control device 100 whether the payout control can be started is determined and the output data of the payout busy signal is edited.
22) is performed, and the process returns to step A13.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing in the payout control device 200 will be described. In the timer interrupt processing, the periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is CP.
It is started by inputting to U211A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the payout microcomputer, the timer interrupt process of FIG. 68 is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, first, a register save process (step A31) for transferring the value held in a predetermined register to the RWM is performed. In the Z80 series microcomputer used as the payout microcomputer in this embodiment, the processing can be replaced by saving the value held in the front register to the back register. Next, based on the output data set in various processes, output processing (step A32) for performing drive control of the payout motor, etc. is performed, input from various sensors and switches, and signal capture, that is, each. The input process (step A33) for reading the state of the input port is performed.

Next, a timer update process (step A34) for updating various timers is performed, and a command reception process for receiving a command from the game control device 100 is performed (step A35).
Then, a ball lending request monitoring process (step A36) is performed, in which a ball lending request or the like from the card unit is checked, and a setting is made so that the prize ball or the lending ball can be paid out. After that, an input monitoring process (step A37) for monitoring the input switch system signals such as the signal from the payout ball detection switch 81, the shoot ball out switch 82, the overflow switch 83, and the frame radio wave sensor 84 and the abnormality detection signal 1. I do.

Then, the payout unit editing process (step A38) for editing the control signal of the payout motor is performed, and the payout prize ball signal to be transmitted to an external device such as a hall computer is edited every time the number of prize balls actually paid out reaches a predetermined number. The external information editing process (step A39) is performed. continue,
After declaring the end of the interrupt (step A40) and performing the process of restoring the register data saved in step A31 (step A41), the process of permitting the interrupt (step A42).
To end the timer interrupt processing.

[Command reception processing]
FIG. 69 shows a command reception process (step A) in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 68.
35) was shown. In this command reception process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a received command in the serial reception buffer register of the serial communication circuit that receives the command transmitted from the game control device 100 (step A51). If there is no received command (step A51; N), the command reception process ends. If there is a received command (step A51; Y), the received command is read from the receive buffer register to the register of the CPU 211A (step A52).

Next, it is determined whether the received command read to the register of the CPU 211A has a normal value (step A53), and if it is not a normal value (step A53; N), the command receiving process ends. In this case, the received command is discarded. When the value is normal (step A53; Y), it is determined whether the receive buffer area, which is the storage area provided in the RAM 211B, is full (step A54).

When the reception buffer area is full (step A54; Y), the command reception process ends. In this case, the received command is discarded. If the receive buffer area is not full (step A54; N), the number of received commands in the command reception counter indicating the number of commands stored in the receive buffer area is updated by +1 (step A55). In the receive buffer area in the present embodiment, 16 areas for storing received commands are prepared, and when the command reception counter is 16, it is determined that the receive buffer area is full. There is. The number of storage areas provided in the reception buffer area can be arbitrarily set and may be one.

After that, the address of the receive buffer area corresponding to the command write index indicating the area for storing the command received this time is calculated (step A56), and the receive command is saved in the calculated receive buffer area (step A57). Then, the command write index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 15 (step A58), and the command reception process is terminated.

The number of commands transmitted to the payout control device 200 is smaller than the number of commands transmitted to the effect control device 300. Therefore, the number of areas for storing the commands received by the payout control device 200 (16 in this case) is smaller than the number of areas in which the commands received in the effect control device 300 are stored (32 in this case). ..

FIG. 70 is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the command reception process executed by the CPU 211A of the payout control device 200. Each program list of the game control program executed by the payout control device 200 is a list of instructions in assembly language (source code) similar to Z80, which is an 8-bit microprocessor, except for pseudo instructions (instructions for the assembler) and the like. , One-to-one correspondence with machine language instructions (machine code) stored in ROM211B (game control program storage means).

From the left side, the description of the instruction (code) in each program list is the "line number" attached for convenience, the "mnemonic" indicating the operation content (operation content) of the instruction, the "operand" to be instructed, and the convenience of explanation. It is divided into "comments" attached for. The instructions in the program list are basically executed from the top to the bottom of the program list in the order of line numbers (from small to large) unless there is an instruction to call a subroutine or a jump instruction (branch instruction).

The codes of line numbers 4020 and 4030 correspond to the processing of step A51. Line number 402
At 0, the value of the receive buffer status register (value corresponding to the label C_RXBST), which is a register indicating how many bytes of data received are in the A register, is loaded. At line number 4030, the command reception process ends when there is no receive command.

The codes of line numbers 4060 to 4090 correspond to the processes of steps A52 and A53. In line number 4060, the command received in the W register (value corresponding to label C_RXBUF).
Is loaded, and line numbers 4070 to 4080 end when the loaded value is not defined as a command. That is, the validity is checked on the register of the CPU 211A before the received command is stored in the RAM 211C. Since there are few types of commands sent to the payout control device 200 and the range of commands is narrow, it is easy to check the validity, and the check is performed before storing in the receive buffer area to speed up the process. ..

The codes of line numbers 4120 to 4150 correspond to the processes of steps A54 and A55. In line number 4120, the command reception counter (label R_COM_CNT + 0) is stored in the HL register.
Load the numerical value corresponding to 0H). In line numbers 4130 and 4140, the loaded value is 16.
If so, the receive buffer area is full and the process ends. Line number 4150 updates the number of received commands by +1 when the receive buffer area is not full.

The codes of line numbers 4180 to 4200 correspond to the processes of steps A56 and A57. In line number 4180, the start address of the receive buffer area (label R_COM_) is stored in the HL register.
The numerical value corresponding to BUF + 00H) is loaded, and in the line number 4190, the command write index (the numerical value corresponding to the label R_WRIT_IDX + 00H) is loaded into the A register. In line number 4200, the command stored in the W register is stored at the address corresponding to the value obtained by adding the value of the A register to the HL register.

The codes at line numbers 4230 to 4250 correspond to the process of step A58. Line number 42
At 30 and 4240, the value of the A register is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 15. Line number 4250
Then, the value of the A register is stored in the area of the command write index (label R_WRIT_IDX + 00H).

[Distribution device control start determination process]
FIG. 71 shows the payout device control start determination process (step A20) in the main process shown in FIG. 67. In this payout device control start determination process, first, it is determined whether or not a payout excess error is in progress (step A61). The overpayment error is an error that occurs when the cumulative value of the number of balls paid out more than the number of balls to be paid out in the prize ball or ball lending becomes a predetermined number (for example, 16). If this payout excess error is in progress (step A61; Y), the payout device control start determination process ends. In addition, when the overpayment error is not in progress (step A61; N).
) Determines whether the ball lending request has been detected (step A62). The ball lending request is a request for paying out the ball lending input from the card unit based on the operation of the player, and the fact that the ball lending request has been detected means that the ball lending request is detected after the ball lending request is detected. It is a state until the ball lending operation based on is started.

When the ball lending request has been detected (step A62; Y), the ball lending control mode in-progress flag is set in the payout device control mode flag (step A74), and the payout device control start determination process is terminated. Since the confirmation of the detection of the ball lending request is performed before the process of paying out the prize balls shown below, the ball lending control mode in-flag is set by overwriting the prize ball control mode in-flag. That is, if both the payout of the prize ball and the payout of the rental ball are feasible, the payout of the rental ball is given priority.

If the ball lending request has not been detected (step A62; N), it is determined whether the prize ball payout start prohibition state is set (step A63). The prize ball payout start prohibition state is a state in which the start of prize ball payout is prohibited, and the frame radio wave sensor 84 is set based on the detection of radio waves during a frame radio wave error, or the sensor or proximity. This applies when a switch error is occurring, which is set based on the detection of an abnormal condition such as an unauthorized short circuit of the switch lead wire, disconnection of the sensor or switch from the connector, or disconnection of the lead wire and floating. .. When the prize ball payout start prohibition state is in the payout start prohibition state (step A63; Y), the payout device control start determination process is terminated. If the prize ball payout start is not prohibited (step A63; N), RA
It is determined whether there is a received command in the receive buffer area of M211C (step A64).
).

When there is a receive command in the receive buffer area (step A64; Y), the number of received commands in the command reception counter is updated by -1 (step A65), and the receive buffer corresponding to the command read index indicating the area for reading the command next. Calculate the area (step A)
66). Then, the receive command is read from the calculated receive buffer area (step A6).
7), the read receive buffer area is cleared (step A68), and the command read index is updated by -1 in the range of 0 to 15 (step A69).

Next, it is determined whether the received command is a normal value (step A70). Payout control device 2
In 00, in addition to the determination of the correctness at the time of receiving the command, the validity is also determined in the process corresponding to the command. If the received command is not a normal value (step A70; N),
Return to step A64. In this case, the read command is discarded. If the received command is a normal value (step A70; Y), the number of prize balls corresponding to the received command is added to the remaining number of acquired game balls (step A71), and the process returns to step A64. What is the remaining number of acquired game balls?
This is the number of prize balls for which payout has not been completed among the prize balls for which payout has been set based on the payout command.

When the processes of steps A64 to A71 are repeated and there is no receive command in the receive buffer area (step A64; N), it is determined whether or not the remaining number of acquired game balls is 0 (step A72), and the remaining number of acquired game balls remains. If it is 0 (step A72; N), the payout device control start determination process is terminated. If the remaining number of acquired game balls is not 0 (step A72; Y),
Set the prize ball control mode flag to the payout device control mode flag (step A73).
The payout device control start determination process is terminated.

That is, the card unit is a ball lending command related to the ejection of the lending ball based on the operation of the player (
It serves as a ball lending signal control means that outputs a ball lending request). Further, the payout control device 200 has a prize ball command (payout command) transmitted from the game control means (game control device 100) and a ball lending command (ball lending request) transmitted from the ball lending signal control means (card unit). Based on the above, the payout control means for controlling the payout of the game ball is formed.

[Payout busy signal editing process]
72 shows the payout busy signal editing process (step A) in the main process shown in FIG. 67.
22) is shown. In this payout busy signal editing process, on-data of the payout busy signal is set when the payout control of the prize ball cannot be started (step A97), and the payout busy signal is turned off when the payout control of the prize ball can be started. Set the data (step A96).

The case where the payout control of the prize ball cannot be started is the case where the payout is prohibited (step A91).
Y), when the ball lending control mode and the prize ball control mode are not in the standby operation (step A92; Y), and when the shoot ball out switch is in an undetermined state (step A93; Y). When the overflow switch is in an undetermined state (step A94; Y)
, When the receive buffer area is full (step A95; Y).

In addition, the payout prohibition state is when an error such as a shoot ball out error (ball out), overflow error (overflow), frame radio wave error, switch error, or overpayment error has occurred. Is set to. Also, the undetermined state of the switch is
The detection status of the switch has not been determined. The detection state of the switch is determined when the state in which the switch detects an error state or a normal state (on or off) continues for a specified time. Since the detection state of the switch is reset when the power is turned on, the detection state of the switch becomes an undetermined state until the error state or the normal state of the switch continues for a specified time. If the error status is detected continuously for a specified time and the switch detection status is confirmed as an error status, the error status is canceled if the error status is not detected for a predetermined time. It is designed to do.

The game control device 100 does not transmit a payout command when the payout busy signal is on. Since the payout control device 200 does not have a backup function in the event of a power outage, if the payout commands are sent one after another during the payout of prize balls or rental balls or in a situation where the payout cannot be made, a prize will be given in the event of a power outage. The memory of the number of balls disappears, and accurate payout becomes impossible. In addition, the receive buffer area for storing commands may become full. For this reason, the payout busy signal indicates whether or not the payout command can be received so that the payout command can be received only when the payout control can be started immediately.

Since the command is not transmitted from the game control device 100 in the state where the command cannot be processed in this way, basically, the receive buffer area is full, or a new command is added when the receive buffer area is full. Will not be received. Therefore, when a new command is received while the reception buffer area is full, some abnormality has occurred in the game control device 100 or the payout control device 200, fraudulent activity has been performed, or noise. It is highly possible that the new command is not a normal command because it may have been affected by such factors.

Therefore, in the payout control device 200, when a new command is received while the receive buffer area is full, the new command is discarded. That is, the oldest command stored in the receive buffer area is likely to be the command sent before the abnormal state occurred, and if the oldest command is overwritten with a new command, it is a normal command. May be overwritten with an invalid command. Therefore, it is possible to minimize the influence on the game by discarding a new command that is likely to be an invalid command.

FIG. 73 shows an outline of the processing at the time of receiving a command in the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200. The effect control device 300 stores the command received from the game control device 100 in the register of the CPU 311 (step S11), and then stores it in the reception command area which is a dedicated area of the RAM 322 (step S12). Then, the command is taken out from the receive command area, which is a dedicated area, to the register of the CPU 311 to confirm the validity (step S13).

If the received command is not a normal value (step S14; N), the received command is discarded. If the received command has a normal value (step S14; Y), RA
The address of the command buffer area, which is the command storage area of M322, is calculated (step S15). When the command buffer area, which is the command storage area of the RAM 322, is not full (step S16; N), the command is stored at the calculated address. When the command buffer area, which is the command storage area of the RAM 322, is full (step S16; Y), the new command is overwritten and stored at the address where the oldest command is stored.

In the payout control device 200, the command received from the game control device 100 is sent to the CPU 211A.
It is stored in the register of (step S21), and then the validity is confirmed on the register (step S22). If the received command is not a normal value (step S23; N), the received command is discarded. If the received command has a normal value (step S23; Y).
) Calculates the address of the receive buffer area which is the command storage area of the RAM 211C (step S24). When the receive buffer area, which is the command storage area of the RAM 211C, is not full (step S25; N), the command is stored at the calculated address (step S26). If the receive buffer area, which is the command storage area of the RAM 211C, is full (step S25; Y), the received command is discarded (step S2).
8).

As described above, the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 are different in the processing of the command received from the game control device 100. Since the payout control device 200 confirms the validity of the command on the register of the CPU 211A, the number of processes is small and high-speed processing is possible. There are few types of commands to the payout control device 200, and it is easy to confirm the validity, and even if they are processed on the register, no inconvenience occurs. On the other hand, the effect control device 300 stores the received command in the dedicated area of the RAM 322 and then confirms the validity. Since the number and types of commands transmitted to the effect control device 300 are larger than those of the payout control device 200 and the validity confirmation process is complicated, the validity is confirmed once stored in the RAM 322. We are making sure that processing can be performed.

Further, when the storage area of the command is full, the payout control device 200 discards the new command. As described above, the command storage area does not normally fill up, it is in some abnormal state, and the new command is likely to be an invalid command. If you pay out by such an illegal command, you may be paid out more than planned. In particular, it is possible that a large number of commands are being sent due to fraudulent activity, so it is possible to prevent fraudulent payouts by discarding new commands.

On the other hand, in the effect control device 300, the new command is replaced with the oldest command. Even in the effect control device 300, the command storage area does not normally become full, and it is conceivable that some abnormal state occurs. When the command is received, the contents of the command have not been analyzed yet, and it may be an important command. Therefore, even if the command storage area is full, a new command should be saved and the necessary command should be saved. It is prevented from discarding. Also, the new command is more likely to be more relevant to the current situation than the old command, and the old command is often no longer needed, so save the new command. ing.

Further, the game machine state commands 1 and 2 including information on the presence or absence of an abnormality of the game machine are periodically transmitted from the game control device 100, and when there is no space in the command storage area, this is used. It is conceivable that a plurality of gaming machine status commands 1 and 2 are stored. Since the most recently received commands of the game machine status commands 1 and 2 represent the current status and the old commands are not necessary, there is no problem even if they are discarded by overwriting. Further, even if the newest gaming machine status commands 1 and 2 are discarded by overwriting, there is no problem in grasping the status of the gaming machine because they are periodically transmitted.

Although the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 have been described here, the same processing can be performed for other slave control devices that receive information from the game control device 100. In this case, depending on the nature of the slave control device, it is selected whether the processing is the same as that of the effect control device 300 or the same processing as that of the payout control device 200. Further, the processing method of such a command can be applied to any control device as long as it receives a command from another control device, not limited to the control device that receives the command from the game control device 100. Is.

From the above, the game control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game in the game machine capable of executing the game based on the satisfaction of the predetermined conditions and paying out the game medium based on the satisfaction of the predetermined payout conditions. ), The effect control means (effect control device 300) that controls the effect based on the effect information transmitted from the game control means, and the payout control that controls the payout of the game medium based on the payout information transmitted from the game control means. The effect control means includes means (payout control device 200), and the effect control means includes effect information storage means (RAM 322) having an effect information storage area (command buffer area) for storing received effect information, and unprocessed effect information. When new effect information is received when there is no space in the effect information storage area, the oldest effect information is discarded and the new effect information is stored, and the payout control means stores the received payout information. A payout information storage means having a payout information storage area is provided, and when new payout information is received in a state where there is no space in the payout information storage area due to unprocessed payout information, the new payout information is discarded. It will be done. Therefore, it is possible to take measures according to each control means when the received command cannot be stored, and the influence on the progress of the game can be minimized. Therefore, it is appropriate to deal with the problem. Can be.

Further, in a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition and paying out a game medium based on the fulfillment of a predetermined payout condition, a game control means for comprehensively controlling the game (
The game control device 100), the first slave control means (for example, the effect control device 300) forming the slave control means for performing control based on the information transmitted from the game control means, and the second slave control means (for example, for example).
The payout control device 200), and the first slave control means and the second slave control means are information storage means (RAM 322, R) having an information storage area including a plurality of areas for sequentially storing received information.
AM211C) is provided respectively, the first slave control means is provided with a larger number of areas than the second slave control means, and the first control means is newly provided in a state where there is no space in the information storage area due to unprocessed information. When the information is received, the information in the area where the oldest information is stored is discarded and new information is stored in the area, and the second control means has no space in the information storage area due to the unprocessed information. When new information is received in the state, the new information is discarded. Therefore, when the received command cannot be stored, the countermeasure can be taken according to the number of storage areas in each control means, and the influence on the progress of the game can be minimized. The response to can be made appropriate.

Further, the first slave control means is an effect control means (effect control device 300) that controls the effect based on the effect information forming the information transmitted from the game control means, and the second slave control means is the game control means. It is a payout control means (payout control device 200) that controls payout of the game medium based on the payout information forming the information transmitted from. Therefore, it is possible to take measures according to each control means when the received command cannot be stored, and the influence on the progress of the game can be minimized. Therefore, it is appropriate to deal with the problem. Can be.

Further, in a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition and paying out a game medium based on the fulfillment of a predetermined payout condition, the game control means for comprehensively controlling the game and the game control means are transmitted. Subordinate control means (payout control device 200) that controls based on the information
, The effect control device 300), and the slave control means includes information storage means (RAM322, RAM211C) having an information storage area including a plurality of areas for sequentially storing received information, and stores new information. It is provided with a write index indicating an area to be read, a read index indicating an area for reading information next, and an information counter (command reception counter) indicating the number of areas in which information is currently stored. Therefore, the writing area and the reading area of the information can be appropriately grasped, and the information of the free area at the present time can be obtained, the reading and writing of the information can be appropriately managed, and the control process can be efficiently performed.

Further, the slave control means includes an effect control means that controls the effect based on the effect information that forms the information transmitted from the game control means, and a game medium payout based on the payout information that forms the information transmitted from the game control means. The effect control means includes, as an information storage means, an effect information storage unit (RAM 322) having an effect information storage area forming an information storage area for storing received effect information, including a payout control means for controlling information. If the effect information counter that forms the counter is in a state indicating that there is no space in the effect information storage area and new effect information is received, the information in the area that stores the oldest effect information is discarded and the relevant effect information is received. The payout control means, which stores new effect information in the area, includes a payout information storage means (RAM211C) having a payout information storage area forming an information storage area for storing received payout information, and an information counter. If a new payout information is received when the payout information counter is in a state indicating that there is no space in the payout information storage area, the new payout information is discarded. Therefore, it is possible to take measures according to each control means when the received command cannot be stored, and the influence on the progress of the game can be minimized. Therefore, it is appropriate to deal with the problem. Can be.

Further, as a game control means for comprehensively controlling a game in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. , The game control means for controlling the effect based on the effect information transmitted from the game control means, and the game control means includes the information regarding the presence or absence of an abnormality in the game machine as the effect information. Information can be periodically transmitted to the effect control means, and the effect control means includes an effect information storage unit having an effect information storage area for storing the received effect information, and the unprocessed effect information is used in the effect information storage area. When new production information is received when there is no space, the oldest production information is discarded and new production information is stored. Only the latest information on the gaming machine status that is periodically transmitted is required, and the old one is no longer necessary. Therefore, since the influence on the progress of the game can be minimized for the measures to be taken when the received command cannot be stored, it is possible to take appropriate measures for the problems.

Further, the gaming control means periodically transmits the gaming machine status information only when an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the command transmission frequency from becoming high in a normal case, and it is possible to reduce the burden of control. Further, since the abnormality is periodically transmitted, no problem occurs even if the command is missed, and the abnormality can be reliably notified to the effect control means.

In addition, the game control means periodically transmits the game machine status information over a certain period of time when the abnormality generated in the game machine is resolved. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the effect control means that the abnormality has been resolved.

Further, the effect control means includes an effect calculation processing means (CPU311) which is an arithmetic processing means for performing arithmetic processing for the effect, an effect information storage unit (RAM322) having an effect information storage area for storing received effect information, and an effect information storage unit (RAM322). When the effect information is received, the effect information is stored in the effect information storage area without performing predetermined processing to be executed for the effect information on the register of the effect calculation processing means. The payout control means is a payout calculation processing means (CP), which is a calculation processing means for performing a predetermined process on the effect information and performing a calculation process on the payout.
U211A) and a payout information storage means (RAM211C) having a payout information storage area for storing the received payout information, and when the payout information is received, the payout information is predetermined on the register of the payout calculation processing means. It means that the payout information is stored in the payout information storage area after the processing is performed. The type and range of contents of the received command differ depending on the control means, and the control process can be efficiently advanced by making the process of the received command suitable for each control means.

Further, the predetermined process is a legitimacy determination process for determining the legitimacy of the effect information or the payout information, and if the legitimacy determination process determines that the legitimacy is not valid, the effect information or the payout information is discarded. It means that it was done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring based on an invalid command. The legitimacy determination process for determining the legitimacy of the effect information and the legitimacy determination process for determining the legitimacy of the payout information may be different processes or may be the same process.

Further, when the effect information is received, the effect control means stores the effect information in a dedicated area of the effect information storage area, then performs a legitimacy determination process on the effect information, and is legitimate by the legitimacy determination process. When it is determined that the effect information is stored in the storage area of the effect information storage area, the payout control means receives the payout information on the register of the payout calculation processing means. It means that the payout information is stored in the payout information storage area after the validity determination process is performed. Therefore, since it is stored in the storage area only when the validity is confirmed, unnecessary commands are not stored in the storage area, and the control process can be efficiently advanced.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above embodiment as the gaming machine, and is, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. It is applicable to all gaming machines that use the gaming ball of. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. This slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as a slot machine that uses a game ball.

It should also be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

10 Game machine 100 Game control device (game control means)
200 Payout control device (payout control means)
211C RAM (payout information storage means)
300 Production control device (Production control means)
322 RAM (Direction information storage means)

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that can execute a game based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition and pay out a game medium based on the fulfillment of a predetermined payout condition.
A game control means that controls the game in an integrated manner,
An effect control means that controls the effect based on the effect information transmitted from the game control means, and
A payout control means for controlling the payout of the game medium based on the payout information transmitted from the game control means is provided.
The payout control means is
A payout information storage means having a payout information storage area for storing the received payout information is provided.
When the payout information is received, the legitimacy determination process for determining the legitimacy of the payout information is performed on the register provided in the payout control means, and the legitimacy is determined by the legitimacy determination process . Later, the payout information is stored in the payout information storage area, and when it is determined by the legitimacy determination process that the payout information is not valid, the payout information is not stored in the payout information storage area.
When the new payout information is received in a state where the payout information storage area is full due to the unprocessed payout information, the new payout information is discarded.
The effect control means is
An effect information storage means having an effect information storage area for storing the received effect information, and an effect information storage means.
A write index indicating the effect information storage area for storing new effect information, and
Next, a read index indicating the effect information storage area for reading the effect information, and
It is provided with an information counter indicating the number of the effect information storage areas in which the effect information is currently stored.
When the effect information is received, the effect information is stored in the dedicated area of the effect information storage area without performing the legitimacy determination process for determining the legitimacy of the effect information on the register provided in the effect control means. After storing in, the legitimacy of the effect information is determined, and if it is determined to be legitimate by the legitimacy determination, the effect information is stored in the storage area of the effect information storage area, and the legitimacy is determined by the legitimacy determination. A gaming machine characterized in that the effect information is not stored in the storage area of the effect information storage area when it is determined that the information is not .

Images